Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

US20030198965A1 - Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression - Google Patents

Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20030198965A1
US20030198965A1 US10/126,355 US12635502A US2003198965A1 US 20030198965 A1 US20030198965 A1 US 20030198965A1 US 12635502 A US12635502 A US 12635502A US 2003198965 A1 US2003198965 A1 US 2003198965A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
acid
hydroxysteroid
antisense oligonucleotide
compound
artificial sequence
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US10/126,355
Inventor
Susan Freier
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US10/126,355 priority Critical patent/US20030198965A1/en
Assigned to ISIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment ISIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: FREIER, SUSAN M.
Priority to PCT/US2003/012544 priority patent/WO2003088921A2/en
Priority to US10/511,832 priority patent/US7816336B2/en
Priority to AU2003231050A priority patent/AU2003231050A1/en
Publication of US20030198965A1 publication Critical patent/US20030198965A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • C12N15/1137Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing against enzymes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H21/00Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids
    • C07H21/02Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids with ribosyl as saccharide radical
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12YENZYMES
    • C12Y101/00Oxidoreductases acting on the CH-OH group of donors (1.1)
    • C12Y101/01Oxidoreductases acting on the CH-OH group of donors (1.1) with NAD+ or NADP+ as acceptor (1.1.1)
    • C12Y101/0114611-Beta-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase (1.1.1.146)
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/31Chemical structure of the backbone
    • C12N2310/315Phosphorothioates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/32Chemical structure of the sugar
    • C12N2310/3212'-O-R Modification
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/33Chemical structure of the base
    • C12N2310/334Modified C
    • C12N2310/33415-Methylcytosine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/34Spatial arrangement of the modifications
    • C12N2310/341Gapmers, i.e. of the type ===---===
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/34Spatial arrangement of the modifications
    • C12N2310/346Spatial arrangement of the modifications having a combination of backbone and sugar modifications
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02PCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
    • Y02P20/00Technologies relating to chemical industry
    • Y02P20/50Improvements relating to the production of bulk chemicals
    • Y02P20/582Recycling of unreacted starting or intermediate materials

Definitions

  • the present invention provides compositions and methods for modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • this invention relates to compounds, particularly oligonucleotides, specifically hybridizable with nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. Such compounds have been shown to modulate the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • the adrenal gland produces three kinds of steroid hormones: glucocorticoids, mineralocorticoids and adrenal androgens.
  • Cortisol and corticosterone are the essential human glucocorticoids which play important roles in salt and water homeostasis and blood pressure control.
  • Clinical conditions arising from an excess or deficiency of glucocorticoids or mineralocorticoids include Cushing's syndrome, primary aldosteronism, Addison's disease and congenital adrenal hyperplasia (Shimojo and Stewart, J. Endocrinol. Invest., 1995, 18, 518-532).
  • Obesity is associated with adverse metabolic consequences such as diabetes and dyslipidemia.
  • One identified cause of viceral obesity and metabolic complications is exposure to excessive levels of glucocorticoids (Bjorntorp and Rosmond, Nutrition, 2000, 16, 924-936).
  • hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 (also known as HSD11B1, HSD-11 and 11-beta-OHSD) plays a pivotal role in determining intracellular glucocorticoid concentrations by regenerating active glucocorticoid (cortisol in humans, corticosterone in rats and mice) from inactive cortisone and 11-dehydrocorticosterone and has been suggested to serve as a tissue-specific amplifier of gucocorticoid action (Bjorntorp and Rosmond, Nutrition, 2000, 16, 924-936).
  • Hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 has been cloned and mapped to chromosome 1q32-q34 (Tannin et al., J. Biol. Chem., 1991, 266, 16653-16658). It is widely expressed, most notably in liver, lung, adipose tissue, vasculature, ovary and the central nervous system (Seckl and Walker, Endocrinology, 2001, 142, 1371-1376).
  • Rask et al. have recently demonstrated elevated levels of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 activity in adipose tissue from obese humans and impaired activity in the liver (Rask et al., J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab., 2001, 86, 1418-1421).
  • Masuzaki et al. have created transgenic mice which overexpress hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 selectively in adipose tissue to an extent similar to that found in adipose tissue of obese humans. These mice had increased adipose levels of corticosterone and developed visceral obesity that was exaggerated by a high-fat diet. The mice also exhibited pronounced insulin-resistant diabetes and hyperlipidemia, leading to a proposal that increased adipocyte hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 activity may be a common molecular etiology for visceral obesity (Masuzaki et al., Science, 2001, 294, 2166-2170).
  • mice homozygous for a targeted deletion of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 gene are viable and developmentally normal but cannot regenerate active corticosterone from inert 11-dehydrocorticosterone in vivo, demonstrating that hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is the sole 11-beta-reductase in the body (Kotelevtsev et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 1997, 94, 14924-14929).
  • mice show attenuated activation of glucocorticoid-sensitive hepatic gluconeogenic enzymes in response to stress or high-fat diets and have a disease resistant phenotype (Kotelevtsev et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 1997, 94, 14924-14929).
  • TZD thiazolidinedione
  • WO 01/30383 Disclosed and claimed in PCT publication WO 01/30383 is a medicament comprising hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 antisense oligonucleotides combined with an antigen in order to improve and optimize tolerance induction (Wilckens, 2001).
  • Antisense phosphorothioate oligonucleotides targeting the start codon of human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 have been employed in investigations of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 activity and effects on vascular contractile response and glucocorticoid metabolism in human vascular tissue (Hatakeyama et al., Front. Sci. Ser., 2000, 29, 173-174; Souness et al., Steroids, 2002, 67, 195-201).
  • Antisense technology is emerging as an effective means for reducing the expression of specific gene products and may therefore prove to be uniquely useful in a number of therapeutic, diagnostic, and research applications for the modulation of expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • the present invention provides compositions and methods for modulating expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • the present invention is directed to compounds, particularly antisense oligonucleotides, which are targeted to a nucleic acid encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, and which modulate the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • Pharmaceutical and other compositions comprising the compounds of the invention are also provided. Further provided are methods of modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 in cells or tissues comprising contacting said cells or tissues with one or more of the antisense compounds or compositions of the invention.
  • the present invention employs oligomeric compounds, particularly antisense oligonucleotides, for use in modulating the function of nucleic acid molecules encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, ultimately modulating the amount of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 produced. This is accomplished by providing antisense compounds which specifically hybridize with one or more nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • target nucleic acid and “nucleic acid encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1” encompass DNA encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, RNA (including pre-mRNA and mRNA) transcribed from such DNA, and also cDNA derived from such RNA.
  • RNA including pre-mRNA and mRNA
  • cDNA derived from such RNA.
  • the specific hybridization of an oligomeric compound with its target nucleic acid interferes with the normal function of the nucleic acid. This modulation of function of a target nucleic acid by compounds which specifically hybridize to it is generally referred to as “antisense”.
  • the functions of DNA to be interfered with include replication and transcription.
  • RNA to be interfered with include all vital functions such as, for example, translocation of the RNA to the site of protein translation, translocation of the RNA to sites within the cell which are distant from the site of RNA synthesis, translation of protein from the RNA, splicing of the RNA to yield one or more mRNA species, and catalytic activity which may be engaged in or facilitated by the RNA.
  • the overall effect of such interference with target nucleic acid function is modulation of the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • modulation means either an increase (stimulation) or a decrease (inhibition) in the expression of a gene.
  • inhibition is the preferred form of modulation of gene expression and mRNA is a preferred target.
  • Targeting an antisense compound to a particular nucleic acid, in the context of this invention, is a multistep process. The process usually begins with the identification of a nucleic acid sequence whose function is to be modulated. This may be, for example, a cellular gene (or mRNA transcribed from the gene) whose expression is associated with a particular disorder or disease state, or a nucleic acid molecule from an infectious agent.
  • the target is a nucleic acid molecule encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
  • the targeting process also includes determination of a site or sites within this gene for the antisense interaction to occur such that the desired effect, e.g., detection or modulation of expression of the protein, will result.
  • a preferred intragenic site is the region encompassing the translation initiation or termination codon of the open reading frame (ORF) of the gene. Since, as is known in the art, the translation initiation codon is typically 5′-AUG (in transcribed mRNA molecules; 5′-ATG in the corresponding DNA molecule), the translation initiation codon is also referred to as the “AUG codon,” the “start codon” or the “AUG start codon”.
  • translation initiation codon having the RNA sequence 5′-GUG, 5′-UUG or 5′-CUG, and 5′-AUA, 5′-ACG and 5′-CUG have been shown to function in vivo.
  • the terms “translation initiation codon” and “start codon” can encompass many codon sequences, even though the initiator amino acid in each instance is typically methionine (in eukaryotes) or formylmethionine (in prokaryotes). It is also known in the art that eukaryotic and prokaryotic genes may have two or more alternative start codons, any one of which may be preferentially utilized for translation initiation in a particular cell type or tissue, or under a particular set of conditions.
  • start codon and “translation initiation codon” refer to the codon or codons that are used in vivo to initiate translation of an mRNA molecule transcribed from a gene encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, regardless of the sequence(s) of such codons.
  • a translation termination codon (or “stop codon”) of a gene may have one of three sequences, i.e., 5′-UAA, 5′-UAG and 5 1 -UGA (the corresponding DNA sequences are 5′-TAA, 5′-TAG and 5′-TGA, respectively).
  • start codon region and “translation initiation codon region” refer to a portion of such an mRNA or gene that encompasses from about 25 to about 50 contiguous nucleotides in either direction (i.e., 5′ or 3′) from a translation initiation codon.
  • stop codon region and “translation termination codon region” refer to a portion of such an mRNA or gene that encompasses from about 25 to about 50 contiguous nucleotides in either direction (i.e., 5′ or 3′) from a translation termination codon.
  • Other target regions include the 5′ untranslated region (5′UTR), known in the art to refer to the portion of an mRNA in the 5′ direction from the translation initiation codon, and thus including nucleotides between the 5′ cap site and the translation initiation codon of an mRNA or corresponding nucleotides on the gene, and the 3′ untranslated region (3′UTR), known in the art to refer to the portion of an mRNA in the 3′ direction from the translation termination codon, and thus including nucleotides between the translation termination codon and 3′ end of an mRNA or corresponding nucleotides on the gene.
  • 5′UTR 5′ untranslated region
  • 3′UTR 3′ untranslated region
  • the 5′ cap of an mRNA comprises an N7-methylated guanosine residue joined to the 5 1 -most residue of the mRNA via a 5′-5′ triphosphate linkage.
  • the 5′ cap region of an mRNA is considered to include the 5′ cap structure itself as well as the first 50 nucleotides adjacent to the cap.
  • the 5′ cap region may also be a preferred target region.
  • mRNA splice sites i.e., intron-exon junctions
  • intron-exon junctions may also be preferred target regions, and are particularly useful in situations where aberrant splicing is implicated in disease, or where an overproduction of a particular mRNA splice product is implicated in disease. Aberrant fusion junctions due to rearrangements or deletions are also preferred targets.
  • fusion transcripts mRNA transcripts produced via the process of splicing of two (or more) mRNAs from different gene sources are known as “fusion transcripts”. It has also been found that introns can also be effective, and therefore preferred, target regions for antisense compounds targeted, for example, to DNA or pre-mRNA.
  • RNA transcripts can be produced from the same genomic region of DNA. These alternative transcripts are generally known as “variants”. More specifically, “pre-mRNA variants” are transcripts produced from the same genomic DNA that differ from other transcripts produced from the same genomic DNA in either their start or stop position and contain both intronic and extronic regions.
  • pre-mRNA variants Upon excision of one or more exon or intron regions or portions thereof during splicing, pre-mRNA variants produce smaller “mRNA variants”. Consequently, mRNA variants are processed pre-mRNA variants and each unique pre-mRNA variant must always produce a unique mRNA variant as a result of splicing. These mRNA variants are also known as “alternative splice variants”. If no splicing of the pre-mRNA variant occurs then the pre-mRNA variant is identical to the mRNA variant.
  • variants can be produced through the use of alternative signals to start or stop transcription and that pre-mRNAs and mRNAs can possess more that one start codon or stop codon.
  • Variants that originate from a pre-mRNA or mRNA that use alternative start codons are known as “alternative start variants” of that pre-mRNA or mRNA.
  • Those transcripts that use an alternative stop codon are known as “alternative stop variants” of that pre-mRNA or mRNA.
  • One specific type of alternative stop variant is the “polyA variant” in which the multiple transcripts produced result from the alternative selection of one of the “polyA stop signals” by the transcription machinery, thereby producing transcripts that terminate at unique polyA sites.
  • oligonucleotides are chosen which are sufficiently complementary to the target, i.e., hybridize sufficiently well and with sufficient specificity, to give the desired effect.
  • hybridization means hydrogen bonding, which may be Watson-Crick, Hoogsteen or reversed Hoogsteen hydrogen bonding, between complementary nucleoside or nucleotide bases.
  • adenine and thymine are complementary nucleobases which pair through the formation of hydrogen bonds.
  • “Complementary,” as used herein, refers to the capacity for precise pairing between two nucleotides.
  • oligonucleotide and the DNA or RNA are considered to be complementary to each other at that position.
  • the oligonucleotide and the DNA or RNA are complementary to each other when a sufficient number of corresponding positions in each molecule are occupied by nucleotides which can hydrogen bond with each other.
  • “specifically hybridizable” and “complementary” are terms which are used to indicate a sufficient degree of complementarity or precise pairing such that stable and specific binding occurs between the oligonucleotide and the DNA or RNA target.
  • an antisense compound need not be 100% complementary to that of its target nucleic acid to be specifically hybridizable.
  • An antisense compound is specifically hybridizable when binding of the compound to the target DNA or RNA molecule interferes with the normal function of the target DNA or RNA to cause a loss of utility, and there is a sufficient degree of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the antisense compound to non-target sequences under conditions in which specific binding is desired, i.e., under physiological conditions in the case of in vivo assays or therapeutic treatment, and in the case of in vitro assays, under conditions in which the assays are performed.
  • Antisense and other compounds of the invention which hybridize to the target and inhibit expression of the target are identified through experimentation, and the sequences of these compounds are hereinbelow identified as preferred embodiments of the invention.
  • the target sites to which these preferred sequences are complementary are hereinbelow referred to as “active sites” and are therefore preferred sites for targeting. Therefore another embodiment of the invention encompasses compounds which hybridize to these active sites, including oligonucleotide probes and primers.
  • Antisense compounds are commonly used as research reagents and diagnostics. For example, antisense oligonucleotides, which are able to inhibit gene expression with seventeen specificity, are often used by those of ordinary skill to elucidate the function of particular genes. Antisense compounds are also used, for example, to distinguish between functions of various members of a biological pathway. Antisense modulation has, therefore, been harnessed for research use.
  • the antisense compounds of the present invention can be used as tools in differential and/or combinatorial analyses to elucidate expression patterns of a portion or the entire complement of genes expressed within cells and tissues.
  • Expression patterns within cells or tissues treated with one or more antisense compounds are compared to control cells or tissues not treated with antisense compounds and the patterns produced are analyzed for differential levels of gene expression as they pertain, for example, to disease association, signaling pathway, cellular localization, expression level, size, structure or function of the genes examined. These analyses can be performed on stimulated or unstimulated cells and in the presence or absence of other compounds which affect expression patterns.
  • Examples of methods of gene expression analysis known in the art include DNA arrays or microarrays (Brazma and Vilo, FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 17-24; Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16), SAGE (serial analysis of gene expression) (Madden, et al., Drug Discov. Today, 2000, 5, 415-425), READS (restriction enzyme amplification of digested cDNAs) (Prashar and Weissman, Methods Enzymol., 1999, 303, 258-72), TOGA (total gene expression analysis) (Sutcliffe, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides have been employed as therapeutic moieties in the treatment of disease states in animals and man.
  • Antisense oligonucleotide drugs, including ribozymes, have been safely and effectively administered to humans and numerous clinical trials are presently underway. It is thus established that oligonucleotides can be useful therapeutic modalities that can be configured to be useful in treatment regimes for treatment of cells, tissues and animals, especially humans.
  • oligonucleotide refers to an oligomer or polymer of ribonucleic acid (RNA) or deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or mimetics thereof.
  • RNA ribonucleic acid
  • DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
  • oligonucleotides composed of naturally-occurring nucleobases, sugars and covalent internucleoside (backbone) linkages as well as oligonucleotides having non-naturally-occurring portions which function similarly.
  • backbone covalent internucleoside
  • modified or substituted oligonucleotides are often preferred over native forms because of desirable properties such as, for example, enhanced cellular uptake, enhanced affinity for nucleic acid target and increased stability in the presence of nucleases.
  • antisense oligonucleotides are a preferred form of antisense compound
  • the present invention comprehends other oligomeric antisense compounds, including but not limited to oligonucleotide mimetics such as are described below.
  • the antisense compounds in accordance with this invention preferably comprise from about 8 to about 80 nucleobases (i.e. from about 8 to about 80 linked nucleosides).
  • Particularly preferred antisense compounds are antisense oligonucleotides, even more preferably those comprising from about 12 to about 30 nucleobases.
  • Antisense compounds include ribozymes, external guide sequence (EGS) oligonucleotides (oligozymes), and other short catalytic RNAs or catalytic oligonucleotides which hybridize to the target nucleic acid and modulate its expression.
  • GCS external guide sequence
  • oligozymes oligonucleotides
  • other short catalytic RNAs or catalytic oligonucleotides which hybridize to the target nucleic acid and modulate its expression.
  • nucleoside is a base-sugar combination.
  • the base portion of the nucleoside is normally a heterocyclic base.
  • the two most common classes of such heterocyclic bases are the purines and the pyrimidines.
  • Nucleotides are nucleosides that further include a phosphate group covalently linked to the sugar portion of the nucleoside.
  • the phosphate group can be linked to either the 2′, 3′ or 5′ hydroxyl moiety of the sugar.
  • the phosphate groups covalently link adjacent nucleosides to one another to form a linear polymeric compound.
  • linear structures can be further joined to form a circular structure, however, open linear structures are generally preferred.
  • linear structures may also have internal nucleobase complementarity and may therefore fold in a manner as to produce a double stranded structure.
  • the phosphate groups are commonly referred to as forming the internucleoside backbone of the oligonucleotide.
  • the normal linkage or backbone of RNA and DNA is a 3′ to 5′ phosphodiester linkage.
  • oligonucleotides containing modified backbones or non-natural internucleoside linkages include those that retain a phosphorus atom in the backbone and those that do not have a phosphorus atom in the backbone.
  • modified oligonucleotides that do not have a phosphorus atom in their internucleoside backbone can also be considered to be oligonucleosides.
  • Preferred modified oligonucleotide backbones include, for example, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates, 5′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, selenophosphates and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein one or more internucleotide linkages is a 3′ to 3′, 5′ to 5′ or 2′ to 2′ linkage.
  • Preferred oligonucleotides having inverted polarity comprise a single 3′ to 3′ linkage at the 3′-most internucleotide linkage i.e. a single inverted nucleoside residue which may be abasic (the nucleobase is missing or has a hydroxyl group in place thereof).
  • Various salts, mixed salts and free acid forms are also included.
  • Preferred modified oligonucleotide backbones that do not include a phosphorus atom therein have backbones that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages.
  • morpholino linkages formed in part from the sugar portion of a nucleoside
  • siloxane backbones sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones
  • formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones
  • riboacetyl backbones alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S and CH 2 component parts.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of the above oligonucleosides include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,034,506; 5,166,315; 5,185,444; 5,214,134; 5,216,141; 5,235,033; 5,264,562; 5,264,564; 5,405,938; 5,434,257; 5,466,677; 5,470,967; 5,489,677; 5,541,307; 5,561,225; 5,596,086; 5,602,240; 5,610,289; 5,602,240; 5,608,046; 5,610,289; 5,618,704; 5,623,070; 5,663,312; 5,633,360; 5,677,437; 5,792,608; 5,646,269 and 5,677,439, certain of which are commonly owned with this application, and each of which Is herein incorporated by reference.
  • both the sugar and the internucleoside linkage, i.e., the backbone, of the nucleotide units are replaced with novel groups.
  • the base units are maintained for hybridization with an appropriate nucleic acid target compound.
  • an oligomeric compound an oligonucleotide mimetic that has been shown to have excellent hybridization properties, is referred to as a peptide nucleic acid (PNA).
  • PNA peptide nucleic acid
  • the sugar-backbone of an oligonucleotide is replaced with an amide containing backbone, in particular an aminoethylglycine backbone.
  • nucleobases are retained and are bound directly or indirectly to aza nitrogen atoms of the amide portion of the backbone.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of PNA compounds include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082; 5,714,331; and 5,719,262, each of which is herein incorporated by reference. Further teaching of PNA compounds can be found in Nielsen et al., Science, 1991, 254, 1497-1500.
  • Most preferred embodiments of the invention are oligonucleotides with phosphorothioate backbones and oligonucleosides with heteroatom backbones, and in particular —CH 2 —NH—O—CH 2 —, —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—O—CH 2 — [known as a methylene (methylimino) or MMI backbone], —CH 2 —O—N(CH 3 )—CH 2 —, —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—N(CH 3 )—CH 2 — and —O—N(CH 3 )—CH 2 —CH 2 — [wherein the native phosphodiester backbone is represented as —O—P—O—CH 2 —] of the above referenced U.S.
  • Modified oligonucleotides may also contain one or more substituted sugar moieties.
  • Preferred oligonucleotides comprise one of the following at the 2′ position: OH; F; O-, S-, or N-alkyl; O-, S-, or N-alkenyl; O-, S- or N-alkynyl; or O-alkyl-O-alkyl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl may be substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 10 alkyl or C 2 to C 10 alkenyl and alkynyl.
  • oligonucleotides comprise one of the following at the 2′ position: C 1 to C 1 D lower alkyl, substituted lower alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkaryl, aralkyl, O-alkaryl or O-aralkyl, SH, SCH 3 , OCN, Cl, Br, CN, CF 3 , OCF 3 , SOCH 3 , SO 2 CH 3 , ONO 2 , NO 2 , N 3 , NH 2 , heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkaryl, aminoalkylamino, polyalkylamino, substituted silyl, an RNA cleaving group, a reporter group, an intercalator, a group for improving the pharmacokinetic properties of an oligonucleotide, or a group for improving the pharmacodynamic properties of an oligonucleotide, and other substituents having similar properties.
  • a preferred modification includes 2′-methoxyethoxy (2′-O—CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , also known as 2′-O—(2-methoxyethyl) or 2′-MOE) (Martin et al., Helv. Chim. Acta, 1995, 78, 486-504) i.e., an alkoxyalkoxy group.
  • a further preferred modification includes 2′-dimethylaminooxyethoxy, i.e., a O(CH 2 ) 2 ON(CH 3 ) 2 group, also known as 2′-DMAOE, as described in examples hereinbelow, and 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy (also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl or 2′-DMAEOE), i.e., 2′-O—CH 2 —O—CH 2 —N(CH 2 ) 2 , also described in examples hereinbelow.
  • 2′-dimethylaminooxyethoxy i.e., a O(CH 2 ) 2 ON(CH 3 ) 2 group
  • 2′-DMAOE also known as 2′-DMAOE
  • 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl or 2′-DMAEOE
  • Other preferred modifications include 2′-methoxy (2′-O—CH 3 ), 2′-aminopropoxy (2′-OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 ), 2′-allyl (2′-CH 2 —CH ⁇ CH 2 ), 2′-O-allyl (2′-O—CH 2 —CH ⁇ CH 2 ) and 2′-fluoro (2′-F).
  • the 2′-modification may be in the arabino (up) position or ribo (down) position.
  • a preferred 2′-arabino modification is 2′-F.
  • oligonucleotide Similar modifications may also be made at other positions on the oligonucleotide, particularly the 3′ position of the sugar on the 3′ terminal nucleotide or in 2′-5′ linked oligonucleotides and the 5′ position of 5′ terminal nucleotide. Oligonucleotides may also have sugar mimetics such as cyclobutyl moieties in place of the pentofuranosyl sugar. Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such modified sugar structures include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • a further prefered modification includes Locked Nucleic Acids (LNAs) in which the 2′-hydroxyl group is linked to the 3′ or 4′ carbon atom of the sugar ring thereby forming a bicyclic sugar moiety.
  • the linkage is preferably a methelyne (—CH 2 —) n group bridging the 2′ oxygen atom and the 4′ carbon atom wherein n is 1 or 2.
  • LNAs and preparation thereof are described in WO 98/39352 and WO 99/14226.
  • Oligonucleotides may also include nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions.
  • nucleobases include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), cytosine (C) and uracil (U).
  • Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as 5-methylcytosine (5-me-C), 5-hydroxymethyl cytosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine and 2-thiocytosine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl (—C ⁇ C—CH 3 ) uracil and cytosine and other alkynyl derivatives of pyrimidine bases, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-thioalkyl, 8-hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and gu
  • nucleobases include tricyclic pyrimidines such as phenoxazine cytidine(1H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzoxazin-2(3H)-one), phenothiazine cytidine (1H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzothiazin-2(3H)-one), G-clamps such as a substituted phenoxazine cytidine (e.g.
  • nucleobases may also include those in which the purine or pyrimidine base is replaced with other heterocycles, for example 7-deaza-adenine, 7-deazaguanosine, 2-aminopyridine and 2-pyridone. Further nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat.
  • 5-substituted pyrimidines include 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine.
  • 5-methylcytosine substitutions have been shown to increase nucleic acid duplex stability by 0.6-1.2° C. (Sanghvi, Y. S., Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., eds., Antisense Research and Applications , CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1993, pp. 276-278) and are presently preferred base substitutions, even more particularly when combined with 2′-O-methoxyethyl sugar modifications.
  • Another modification of the oligonucleotides of the invention involves chemically linking to the oligonucleotide one or more moieties or conjugates which enhance the activity, cellular distribution or cellular uptake of the oligonucleotide.
  • the compounds of the invention can include conjugate groups covalently bound to functional groups such as primary or secondary hydroxyl groups.
  • Conjugate groups of the invention include intercalators, reporter molecules, polyamines, polyamides, polyethylene glycols, polyethers, groups that enhance the pharmacodynamic properties of oligomers, and groups that enhance the pharmacokinetic properties of oligomers.
  • Typical conjugates groups include cholesterols, lipids, phospholipids, biotin, phenazine, folate, phenanthridine, anthraquinone, acridine, fluoresceins, rhodamines, coumarins, and dyes.
  • Groups that enhance the pharmacodynamic properties include groups that improve oligomer uptake, enhance oligomer resistance to degradation, and/or strengthen sequence-specific hybridization with RNA.
  • Groups that enhance the pharmacokinetic properties include groups that improve oligomer uptake, distribution, metabolism or excretion. Representative conjugate groups are disclosed in International Patent Application PCT/US92/09196, filed Oct.
  • Conjugate moieties include but are not limited to lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety (Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1989, 86, 6553-6556), cholic acid (Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Let., 1994, 4, 1053-1060), a thioether, e.g., hexyl-S-tritylthiol (Manoharan et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci., 1992, 660, 306-309; Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem.
  • lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety (Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1989, 86, 6553-6556), cholic acid (Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Let., 1994, 4, 1053
  • Acids Res., 1990, 18, 3777-3783 a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain (Manoharan et al., Nucleosides & Nucleotides, 1995, 14, 969-973), or adamantane acetic acid (Manoharan et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1995, 36, 3651-3654), a palmityl moiety (Mishra et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 1995, 1264, 229-237), or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-oxycholesterol moiety (Crooke et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp.
  • Oligonucleotides of the invention may also be conjugated to active drug substances, for example, aspirin, warfarin, phenylbutazone, ibuprofen, suprofen, fenbufen, ketoprofen, (S)-(+)-pranoprofen, carprofen, dansylsarcosine, 2,3,5-triiodobenzoic acid, flufenamic acid, folinic acid, a benzothiadiazide, chlorothiazide, a diazepine, indomethicin, a barbiturate, a cephalosporin, a sulfa drug, an antidiabetic, an antibacterial or an antibiotic. Oligonucleotide-drug conjugates and their preparation are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/334,130 (filed Jun. 15, 1999) which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such oligonucleotide conjugates include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,828,979; 4,948,882; 5,218,105; 5,525,465; 5,541,313; 5,545,730; 5,552,538; 5,578,717, 5,580,731; 5,580,731; 5,591,584; 5,109,124; 5,118,802; 5,138,045; 5,414,077; 5,486,603; 5,512,439; 5,578,718; 5,608,046; 4,587,044; 4,605,735; 4,667,025; 4,762,779; 4,789,737; 4,824,941; 4,835,263; 4,876,335; 4,904,582; 4,958,013; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,245,02
  • the present invention also includes antisense compounds which are chimeric compounds.
  • “Chimeric” antisense compounds or “chimeras,” in the context of this invention, are antisense compounds, particularly oligonucleotides, which contain two or more chemically distinct regions, each made up of at least one monomer unit, i.e., a nucleotide in the case of an oligonucleotide compound.
  • oligonucleotides typically contain at least one region wherein the oligonucleotide is modified so as to confer upon the oligonucleotide increased resistance to nuclease degradation, increased cellular uptake, increased stability and/or increased binding affinity for the target nucleic acid.
  • An additional region of the oligonucleotide may serve as a substrate for enzymes capable of cleaving RNA:DNA or RNA:RNA hybrids.
  • RNase H is a cellular endonuclease which cleaves the RNA strand of an RNA:DNA duplex.
  • RNA target Activation of RNase H, therefore, results in cleavage of the RNA target, thereby greatly enhancing the efficiency of oligonucleotide inhibition of gene expression.
  • the cleavage of RNA:RNA hybrids can, in like fashion, be accomplished through the actions of endoribonucleases, such as interferon-induced RNAseL which cleaves both cellular and viral RNA. Consequently, comparable results can often be obtained with shorter oligonucleotides when chimeric oligonucleotides are used, compared to phosphorothioate deoxyoligonucleotides hybridizing to the same target region.
  • Cleavage of the RNA target can be routinely detected by gel electrophoresis and, if necessary, associated nucleic acid hybridization techniques known in the art.
  • Chimeric antisense compounds of the invention may be formed as composite structures of two or more oligonucleotides, modified oligonucleotides, oligonucleosides and/or oligonucleotide mimetics as described above. Such compounds have also been referred to in the art as hybrids or gapmers. Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such hybrid structures include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • the antisense compounds used in accordance with this invention may be conveniently and routinely made through the well-known technique of solid phase synthesis.
  • Equipment for such synthesis is sold by several vendors including, for example, Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.). Any other means for such synthesis known in the art may additionally or alternatively be employed. It is well known to use similar techniques to prepare oligonucleotides such as the phosphorothioates and alkylated derivatives.
  • the compounds of the invention may also be admixed, encapsulated, conjugated or otherwise associated with other molecules, molecule structures or mixtures of compounds, as for example, liposomes, receptor targeted molecules, oral, rectal, topical or other formulations, for assisting in uptake, distribution and/or absorption.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such uptake, distribution and/or absorption assisting formulations include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • the antisense compounds of the invention encompass any pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or salts of such esters, or any other compound which, upon administration to an animal including a human, is capable of providing (directly or indirectly) the biologically active metabolite or residue thereof. Accordingly, for example, the disclosure is also drawn to prodrugs and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such prodrugs, and other bioequivalents.
  • prodrug indicates a therapeutic agent that is prepared in an inactive form that is converted to an active form (i.e., drug) within the body or cells thereof by the action of endogenous enzymes or other chemicals and/or conditions.
  • prodrug versions of the oligonucleotides of the invention are prepared as SATE [(S-acetyl-2-thioethyl) phosphate] derivatives according to the methods disclosed in WO 93/24510 to Gosselin et al., published Dec. 9, 1993 or in WO 94/26764 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,713 to Imbach et al.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to physiologically and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention: i.e., salts that retain the desired biological activity of the parent compound and do not impart undesired toxicological effects thereto.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts are formed with metals or amines, such as alkali and alkaline earth metals or organic amines.
  • metals used as cations are sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, and the like.
  • suitable amines are N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, ethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, and procaine (see, for example, Berge et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts,” J. of Pharma Sci., 1977, 66, 1-19).
  • the base addition salts of said acidic compounds are prepared by contacting the free acid form with a sufficient amount of the desired base to produce the salt in the conventional manner.
  • the free acid form may be regenerated by contacting the salt form with an acid and isolating the free acid in the conventional manner.
  • the free acid forms differ from their respective salt forms somewhat in certain physical properties such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to their respective free acid for purposes of the present invention.
  • a “pharmaceutical addition salt” includes a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an acid form of one of the components of the compositions of the invention. These include organic or inorganic acid salts of the amines.
  • Preferred acid salts are the hydrochlorides, acetates, salicylates, nitrates and phosphates.
  • Other suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known to those skilled in the art and include basic salts of a variety of inorganic and organic acids, such as, for example, with inorganic acids, such as for example hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid or phosphoric acid; with organic carboxylic, sulfonic, sulfo or phospho acids or N-substituted sulfamic acids, for example acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, hydroxymaleic acid, methylmaleic acid, fumaric acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, oxalic acid, gluconic acid, glucaric acid, glucuronic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, salicylic acid, 4-aminosalicylic
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds may also be prepared with a pharmaceutically acceptable cation.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable cations are well known to those skilled in the art and include alkaline, alkaline earth, ammonium and quaternary ammonium cations. Carbonates or hydrogen carbonates are also possible.
  • salts formed with cations such as sodium, potassium, ammonium, magnesium, calcium, polyamines such as spermine and spermidine, etc.
  • acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids for example hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, nitric acid and the like
  • salts formed with organic acids such as, for example, acetic acid, oxalic acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, citric acid, malic acid, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, tannic acid, palmitic acid, alginic acid, polyglutamic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acid, polygal
  • the antisense compounds of the present invention can be utilized for diagnostics, therapeutics, prophylaxis and as research reagents and kits.
  • an animal preferably a human, suspected of having a disease or disorder which can be treated by modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is treated by administering antisense compounds in accordance with this invention.
  • the compounds of the invention can be utilized in pharmaceutical compositions by adding an effective amount of an antisense compound to a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
  • Use of the antisense compounds and methods of the invention may also be useful prophylactically, e.g., to prevent or delay infection, inflammation or tumor formation, for example.
  • the antisense compounds of the invention are useful for research and diagnostics, because these compounds hybridize to nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, enabling sandwich and other assays to easily be constructed to exploit this fact.
  • Hybridization of the antisense oligonucleotides of the invention with a nucleic acid encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 can be detected by means known in the art. Such means may include conjugation of an enzyme to the oligonucleotide, radiolabelling of the oligonucleotide or any other suitable detection means. Kits using such detection means for detecting the level of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 in a sample may also be prepared.
  • the present invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and formulations which include the antisense compounds of the invention.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be administered in a number of ways depending upon whether local or systemic treatment is desired and upon the area to be treated. Administration may be topical (including ophthalmic and to mucous membranes including vaginal and rectal delivery), pulmonary, e.g., by inhalation or insufflation of powders or aerosols, including by nebulizer; intratracheal, intranasal, epidermal and transdermal), oral or parenteral.
  • Parenteral administration includes intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal or intramuscular injection or infusion; or intracranial, e.g., intrathecal or intraventricular, administration.
  • Oligonucleotides with at least one 2′-O-methoxyethyl modification are believed to be particularly useful for oral administration.
  • compositions and formulations for topical administration may include transdermal patches, ointments, lotions, creams, gels, drops, suppositories, sprays, liquids and powders.
  • Conventional pharmaceutical carriers, aqueous, powder or oily bases, thickeners and the like may be necessary or desirable.
  • Coated condoms, gloves and the like may also be useful.
  • Preferred topical formulations include those in which the oligonucleotides of the invention are in admixture with a topical delivery agent such as lipids, liposomes, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, steroids, chelating agents and surfactants.
  • Preferred lipids and liposomes include neutral (e.g.
  • dioleoylphosphatidyl DOPE ethanolamine dimyristoylphosphatidyl choline DMPC, distearolyphosphatidyl choline) negative (e.g. dimyristoylphosphatidyl glycerol DMPG) and cationic (e.g. dioleoyltetramethylaminopropyl DOTAP and dioleoylphosphatidyl ethanolamine DOTMA).
  • Oligonucleotides of the invention may be encapsulated within liposomes or may form complexes thereto, in particular to cationic liposomes. Alternatively, oligonucleotides may be complexed to lipids, in particular to cationic lipids.
  • Preferred fatty acids and esters include but are not limited arachidonic acid, oleic acid, eicosanoic acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein, dilaurin, glyceryl 1-monocaprate, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, an acylcarnitine, an acylcholine, or a C 1-10 alkyl ester (e.g. isopropylmyristate IPM), monoglyceride, diglyceride or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Topical formulations are described in detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/315,298 filed on May 20, 1999 which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • compositions and formulations for oral administration include powders or granules, microparticulates, nanoparticulates, suspensions or solutions in water or non-aqueous media, capsules, gel capsules, sachets, tablets or minitablets. Thickeners, flavoring agents, diluents, emulsifiers, dispersing aids or binders may be desirable.
  • Preferred oral formulations are those in which oligonucleotides of the invention are administered in conjunction with one or more penetration enhancers surfactants and chelators.
  • Preferred surfactants include fatty acids and/or esters or salts thereof, bile acids and/or salts thereof.
  • Prefered bile acids/salts include chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA) and ursodeoxychenodeoxycholic acid (UDCA), cholic acid, dehydrocholic acid, deoxycholic acid, glucholic acid, glycholic acid, glycodeoxycholic acid, taurocholic acid, taurodeoxycholic acid, sodium tauro-24,25-dihydro-fusidate, sodium glycodihydrofusidate.
  • DCA chenodeoxycholic acid
  • UDCA ursodeoxychenodeoxycholic acid
  • Prefered fatty acids include arachidonic acid, undecanoic acid, oleic acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein, dilaurin, glyceryl 1-monocaprate, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, an acylcarnitine, an acylcholine, or a monoglyceride, a diglyceride or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (e.g. sodium).
  • arachidonic acid arachidonic acid, undecanoic acid, oleic acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein, dilaurin, gly
  • penetration enhancers for example, fatty acids/salts in combination with bile acids/salts.
  • a particularly prefered combination is the sodium salt of lauric acid, capric acid and UDCA.
  • Further penetration enhancers include polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene-20-cetyl ether.
  • Oligonucleotides of the invention may be delivered orally in granular form including sprayed dried particles, or complexed to form micro or nanoparticles.
  • Oligonucleotide complexing agents include poly-amino acids; polyimines; polyacrylates; polyalkylacrylates, polyoxethanes, polyalkylcyanoacrylates; cationized gelatins, albumins, starches, acrylates, polyethyleneglycols (PEG) and starches; polyalkylcyanoacrylates; DEAE-derivatized polyimines, pollulans, celluloses and starches.
  • Particularly preferred complexing agents include chitosan, N-trimethylchitosan, poly-L-lysine, polyhistidine, polyornithine, polyspermines, protamine, polyvinylpyridine, polythiodiethylaminomethylethylene P(TDAE), polyaminostyrene (e.g.
  • compositions and formulations for parenteral, intrathecal or intraventricular administration may include sterile aqueous solutions which may also contain buffers, diluents and other suitable additives such as, but not limited to, penetration enhancers, carrier compounds and other pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • compositions of the present invention include, but are not limited to, solutions, emulsions, and liposome-containing formulations. These compositions may be generated from a variety of components that include, but are not limited to, preformed liquids, self-emulsifying solids and self-emulsifying semisolids.
  • the pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention may be prepared according to conventional techniques well known in the pharmaceutical industry. Such techniques include the step of bringing into association the active ingredients with the pharmaceutical carrier(s) or excipient(s). In general the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredients with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated into any of many possible dosage forms such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gel capsules, liquid syrups, soft gels, suppositories, and enemas.
  • the compositions of the present invention may also be formulated as suspensions in aqueous, non-aqueous or mixed media.
  • Aqueous suspensions may further contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension including, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, sorbitol and/or dextran.
  • the suspension may also contain stabilizers.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated and used as foams.
  • Pharmaceutical foams include formulations such as, but not limited to, emulsions, microemulsions, creams, jellies and liposomes. While basically similar in nature these formulations vary in the components and the consistency of the final product.
  • the preparation of such compositions and formulations is generally known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical and formulation arts and may be applied to the formulation of the compositions of the present invention.
  • compositions of the present invention may be prepared and formulated as emulsions.
  • Emulsions are typically heterogenous systems of one liquid dispersed in another in the form of droplets usually exceeding 0.1 ⁇ m in diameter.
  • Emulsions are often biphasic systems comprising of two immiscible liquid phases intimately mixed and dispersed with each other.
  • emulsions may be either water-in-oil (w/o) or of the oil-in-water (o/w) variety.
  • Emulsions may contain additional components in addition to the dispersed phases and the active drug which may be present as a solution in either the aqueous phase, oily phase or itself as a separate phase. Pharmaceutical excipients such as emulsifiers, stabilizers, dyes, and anti-oxidants may also be present in emulsions as needed.
  • compositions may also be multiple emulsions that are comprised of more than two phases such as, for example, in the case of oil-in-water-in-oil (o/w/o) and water-in-oil-in-water (w/o/w) emulsions.
  • Such complex formulations often provide certain advantages that simple binary emulsions do not.
  • Multiple emulsions in which individual oil droplets of an o/w emulsion enclose small water droplets constitute a w/o/w emulsion.
  • a system of oil droplets enclosed in globules of water stabilized in an oily continuous provides an o/w/o emulsion.
  • Emulsions are characterized by little or no thermodynamic stability. Often, the dispersed or discontinuous phase of the emulsion is well dispersed into the external or continuous phase and maintained in this form through the means of emulsifiers or the viscosity of the formulation. Either of the phases of the emulsion may be a semisolid or a solid, as is the case of emulsion-style ointment bases and creams. Other means of stabilizing emulsions entail the use of emulsifiers that may be incorporated into either phase of the emulsion.
  • Emulsifiers may broadly be classified into four categories: synthetic surfactants, naturally occurring emulsifiers, absorption bases, and finely dispersed solids (Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
  • Synthetic surfactants also known as surface active agents, have found wide applicability in the formulation of emulsions and have been reviewed in the literature (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, volume 1, p. 199).
  • Surfactants are typically amphiphilic and comprise a hydrophilic and a hydrophobic portion.
  • HLB hydrophile/lipophile balance
  • surfactants may be classified into different classes based on the nature of the hydrophilic group: nonionic, anionic, cationic and amphoteric (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285).
  • Naturally occurring emulsifiers used in emulsion formulations include lanolin, beeswax, phosphatides, lecithin and acacia.
  • Absorption bases possess hydrophilic properties such that they can soak up water to form w/o emulsions yet retain their semisolid consistencies, such as anhydrous lanolin and hydrophilic petrolatum. Finely divided solids have also been used as good emulsifiers especially in combination with surfactants and in viscous preparations.
  • polar inorganic solids such as heavy metal hydroxides, nonswelling clays such as bentonite, attapulgite, hectorite, kaolin, montmorillonite, colloidal aluminum silicate and colloidal magnesium aluminum silicate, pigments and nonpolar solids such as carbon or glyceryl tristearate.
  • non-emulsifying materials are also included in emulsion formulations and contribute to the properties of emulsions. These include fats, oils, waxes, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, fatty esters, humectants, hydrophilic colloids, preservatives and antioxidants (Block, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 335; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
  • Hydrophilic colloids or hydrocolloids include naturally occurring gums and synthetic polymers such as polysaccharides (for example, acacia, agar, alginic acid, carrageenan, guar gum, karaya gum, and tragacanth), cellulose derivatives (for example, carboxymethylcellulose and carboxypropylcellulose), and synthetic polymers (for example, carbomers, cellulose ethers, and carboxyvinyl polymers). These disperse or swell in water to form colloidal solutions that stabilize emulsions by forming strong interfacial films around the dispersed-phase droplets and by increasing the viscosity of the external phase.
  • polysaccharides for example, acacia, agar, alginic acid, carrageenan, guar gum, karaya gum, and tragacanth
  • cellulose derivatives for example, carboxymethylcellulose and carboxypropylcellulose
  • synthetic polymers for example, carbomers, cellulose ethers, and
  • emulsions often contain a number of ingredients such as carbohydrates, proteins, sterols and phosphatides that may readily support the growth of microbes, these formulations often incorporate preservatives.
  • preservatives included in emulsion formulations include methyl paraben, propyl paraben, quaternary ammonium salts, benzalkonium chloride, esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and boric acid.
  • Antioxidants are also commonly added to emulsion formulations to prevent deterioration of the formulation.
  • Antioxidants used may be free radical scavengers such as tocopherols, alkyl gallates, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, or reducing agents such as ascorbic acid and sodium metabisulfite, and antioxidant synergists such as citric acid, tartaric acid, and lecithin.
  • free radical scavengers such as tocopherols, alkyl gallates, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, or reducing agents such as ascorbic acid and sodium metabisulfite
  • antioxidant synergists such as citric acid, tartaric acid, and lecithin.
  • the compositions of oligonucleotides and nucleic acids are formulated as microemulsions.
  • a microemulsion may be defined as a system of water, oil and amphiphile which is a single optically isotropic and thermodynamically stable liquid solution (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245).
  • microemulsions are systems that are prepared by first dispersing an oil in an aqueous surfactant solution and then adding a sufficient amount of a fourth component, generally an intermediate chain-length alcohol to form a transparent system.
  • microemulsions have also been described as thermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of two immiscible liquids that are stabilized by interfacial films of surface-active molecules (Leung and Shah, in: Controlled Release of Drugs: Polymers and Aggregate Systems , Rosoff, M., Ed., 1989, VCH Publishers, New York, pages 185-215).
  • Microemulsions commonly are prepared via a combination of three to five components that include oil, water, surfactant, cosurfactant and electrolyte.
  • microemulsion is of the water-in-oil (w/o) or an oil-in-water (o/w) type is dependent on the properties of the oil and surfactant used and on the structure and geometric packing of the polar heads and hydrocarbon tails of the surfactant molecules (Schott, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences , Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 271).
  • microemulsions offer the advantage of solubilizing water-insoluble drugs in a formulation of thermodynamically stable droplets that are formed spontaneously.
  • Surfactants used in the preparation of microemulsions include, but are not limited to, ionic surfactants, non-ionic surfactants, Brij 96, polyoxyethylene oleyl ethers, polyglycerol fatty acid esters, tetraglycerol monolaurate (ML310), tetraglycerol monooleate (MO310), hexaglycerol monooleate (PO310), hexaglycerol pentaoleate (Po500), decaglycerol monocaprate (MCA750), decaglycerol monooleate (MO750), decaglycerol sequioleate (SO750), decaglycerol decaoleate (DAO750), alone or in combination with cosurfactants.
  • the cosurfactant usually a short-chain alcohol such as ethanol, 1-propanol, and 1-butanol, serves to increase the interfacial fluidity by penetrating into the surfactant film and consequently creating a disordered film because of the void space generated among surfactant molecules.
  • Microemulsions may, however, be prepared without the use of cosurfactants and alcohol-free self-emulsifying microemulsion systems are known in the art.
  • the aqueous phase may typically be, but is not limited to, water, an aqueous solution of the drug, glycerol, PEG300, PEG400, polyglycerols, propylene glycols, and derivatives of ethylene glycol.
  • the oil phase may include, but is not limited to, materials such as Captex 300, Captex 355, Capmul MCM, fatty acid esters, medium chain (C8-C12) mono, di, and tri-glycerides, polyoxyethylated glyceryl fatty acid esters, fatty alcohols, polyglycolized glycerides, saturated polyglycolized C8-C10 glycerides, vegetable oils and silicone oil.
  • materials such as Captex 300, Captex 355, Capmul MCM, fatty acid esters, medium chain (C8-C12) mono, di, and tri-glycerides, polyoxyethylated glyceryl fatty acid esters, fatty alcohols, polyglycolized glycerides, saturated polyglycolized C8-C10 glycerides, vegetable oils and silicone oil.
  • Microemulsions are particularly of interest from the standpoint of drug solubilization and the enhanced absorption of drugs.
  • Lipid based microemulsions both o/w and w/o have been proposed to enhance the oral bioavailability of drugs, including peptides (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385-1390; Ritschel, Meth. Find. Exp. Clin. Pharmacol., 1993, 13, 205).
  • Microemulsions afford advantages of improved drug solubilization, protection of drug from enzymatic hydrolysis, possible enhancement of drug absorption due to surfactant-induced alterations in membrane fluidity and permeability, ease of preparation, ease of oral administration over solid dosage forms, improved clinical potency, and decreased toxicity (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385; Ho et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1996, 85, 138-143). Often microemulsions may form spontaneously when their components are brought together at ambient temperature. This may be particularly advantageous when formulating thermolabile drugs, peptides or oligonucleotides. Microemulsions have also been effective in the transdermal delivery of active components in both cosmetic and pharmaceutical applications.
  • microemulsion compositions and formulations of the present invention will facilitate the increased systemic absorption of oligonucleotides and nucleic acids from the gastrointestinal tract, as well as improve the local cellular uptake of oligonucleotides and nucleic acids within the gastrointestinal tract, vagina, buccal cavity and other areas of administration.
  • Microemulsions of the present invention may also contain additional components and additives such as sorbitan monostearate (Grill 3), Labrasol, and penetration enhancers to improve the properties of the formulation and to enhance the absorption of the oligonucleotides and nucleic acids of the present invention.
  • Penetration enhancers used in the microemulsions of the present invention may be classified as belonging to one of five broad categories—surfactants, fatty acids, bile salts, chelating agents, and non-chelating non-surfactants (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p. 92). Each of these classes has been discussed above.
  • liposome means a vesicle composed of amphiphilic lipids arranged in a spherical bilayer or bilayers.
  • Liposomes are unilamellar or multilamellar vesicles which have a membrane formed from a lipophilic material and an aqueous interior. The aqueous portion contains the composition to be delivered. Cationic liposomes possess the advantage of being able to fuse to the cell wall. Non-cationic liposomes, although not able to fuse as efficiently with the cell wall, are taken up by macrophages in vivo.
  • lipid vesicles In order to cross intact mammalian skin, lipid vesicles must pass through a series of fine pores, each with a diameter less than 50 nm, under the influence of a suitable transdermal gradient. Therefore, it is desirable to use a liposome which is highly deformable and able to pass through such fine pores.
  • liposomes obtained from natural phospholipids are biocompatible and biodegradable; liposomes can incorporate a wide range of water and lipid soluble drugs; liposomes can protect encapsulated drugs in their internal compartments from metabolism and degradation (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms , Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245).
  • Important considerations in the preparation of liposome formulations are the lipid surface charge, vesicle size and the aqueous volume of the liposomes.
  • Liposomes are useful for the transfer and delivery of active ingredients to the site of action. Because the liposomal membrane is structurally similar to biological membranes, when liposomes are applied to a tissue, the liposomes start to merge with the cellular membranes. As the merging of the liposome and cell progresses, the liposomal contents are emptied into the cell where the active agent may act.
  • Liposomes present several advantages over other formulations. Such advantages include reduced side-effects related to high systemic absorption of the administered drug, increased accumulation of the administered drug at the desired target, and the ability to administer a wide variety of drugs, both hydrophilic and hydrophobic, into the skin.
  • liposomes to deliver agents including high-molecular weight DNA into the skin.
  • Compounds including analgesics, antibodies, hormones and high-molecular weight DNAs have been administered to the skin. The majority of applications resulted in the targeting of the upper epidermis.
  • Liposomes fall into two broad classes. Cationic liposomes are positively charged liposomes which interact with the negatively charged DNA molecules to form a stable complex. The positively charged DNA/liposome complex binds to the negatively charged cell surface and is internalized in an endosome. Due to the acidic pH within the endosome, the liposomes are ruptured, releasing their contents into the cell cytoplasm (Wang et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 1987, 147, 980-985).
  • Liposomes which are pH-sensitive or negatively-charged, entrap DNA rather than complex with it. Since both the DNA and the lipid are similarly charged, repulsion rather than complex formation occurs. Nevertheless, some DNA is entrapped within the aqueous interior of these liposomes. pH-sensitive liposomes have been used to deliver DNA encoding the thymidine kinase gene to cell monolayers in culture. Expression of the exogenous gene was detected in the target cells (Zhou et al., Journal of Controlled Release, 1992, 19, 269-274).
  • liposomal composition includes phospholipids other than naturally-derived phosphatidylcholine.
  • Neutral liposome compositions can be formed from dimyristoyl phosphatidylcholine (DMPC) or dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC).
  • Anionic liposome compositions generally are formed from dimyristoyl phosphatidylglycerol, while anionic fusogenic liposomes are formed primarily from dioleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE).
  • DOPE dioleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine
  • Another type of liposomal composition is formed from phosphatidylcholine (PC) such as, for example, soybean PC, and egg PC.
  • PC phosphatidylcholine
  • Another type is formed from mixtures of phospholipid and/or phosphatidylcholine and/or cholesterol.
  • Non-ionic liposomal systems have also been examined to determine their utility in the delivery of drugs to the skin, in particular systems comprising non-ionic surfactant and cholesterol.
  • Non-ionic liposomal formulations comprising NovasomeTM I (glyceryl dilaurate/cholesterol/polyoxyethylene-10-stearyl ether) and NovasomeTM II (glyceryl distearate/cholesterol/polyoxyethylene-10-stearyl ether) were used to deliver cyclosporin-A into the dermis of mouse skin. Results indicated that such non-ionic liposomal systems were effective in facilitating the deposition of cyclosporin-A into different layers of the skin (Hu et al. S.T.P.Pharma. Sci., 1994, 4, 6, 466).
  • Liposomes also include “sterically stabilized” liposomes, a term which, as used herein, refers to liposomes comprising one or more specialized lipids that, when incorporated into liposomes, result in enhanced circulation lifetimes relative to liposomes lacking such specialized lipids.
  • sterically stabilized liposomes are those in which part of the vesicle-forming lipid portion of the liposome (A) comprises one or more glycolipids, such as monosialoganglioside G M1 , or (B) is derivatized with one or more hydrophilic polymers, such as a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Liposomes comprising (1) sphingomyelin and (2) the ganglioside G M1 or a galactocerebroside sulfate ester.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,152 discloses liposomes comprising sphingomyelin. Liposomes comprising 1,2-sn-dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine are disclosed in WO 97/13499 (Lim et al.).
  • liposomes comprising lipids derivatized with one or more hydrophilic polymers, and methods of preparation thereof, are known in the art.
  • Sunamoto et al. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 1980, 53, 2778
  • Illum et al. FEBS Lett., 1984, 167, 79
  • hydrophilic coating of polystyrene particles with polymeric glycols results in significantly enhanced blood half-lives.
  • WO 96/40062 to Thierry et al. discloses methods for encapsulating high molecular weight nucleic acids in liposomes.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,264,221 to Tagawa et al. discloses protein-bonded liposomes and asserts that the contents of such liposomes may include an antisense RNA.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,665,710 to Rahman et al. describes certain methods of encapsulating oligodeoxynucleotides in liposomes.
  • WO 97/04787 to Love et al. discloses liposomes comprising antisense oligonucleotides targeted to the raf gene.
  • Transfersomes are yet another type of liposomes, and are highly deformable lipid aggregates which are attractive candidates for drug delivery vehicles. Transfersomes may be described as lipid droplets which are so highly deformable that they are easily able to penetrate through pores which are smaller than the droplet. Transfersomes are adaptable to the environment in which they are used, e.g. they are self-optimizing (adaptive to the shape of pores in the skin), self-repairing, frequently reach their targets without fragmenting, and often self-loading. To make transfersomes it is possible to add surface edge-activators, usually surfactants, to a standard liposomal composition. Transfersomes have been used to deliver serum albumin to the skin. The transfersome-mediated delivery of serum albumin has been shown to be as effective as subcutaneous injection of a solution containing serum albumin.
  • HLB hydrophile/lipophile balance
  • Nonionic surfactants find wide application in pharmaceutical and cosmetic products and are usable over a wide range of pH values. In general their HLB values range from 2 to about 18 depending on their structure.
  • Nonionic surfactants include nonionic esters such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters, polyglyceryl esters, sorbitan esters, sucrose esters, and ethoxylated esters.
  • Nonionic alkanolamides and ethers such as fatty alcohol ethoxylates, propoxylated alcohols, and ethoxylated/propoxylated block polymers are also included in this class.
  • the polyoxyethylene surfactants are the most popular members of the nonionic surfactant class.
  • Anionic surfactants include carboxylates such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates.
  • the most important members of the anionic surfactant class are the alkyl sulfates and the soaps.
  • Cationic surfactants include quaternary ammonium salts and ethoxylated amines. The quaternary ammonium salts are the most used members of this class.
  • amphoteric surfactants include acrylic acid derivatives, substituted alkylamides, N-alkylbetaines and phosphatides.
  • the present invention employs various penetration enhancers to effect the efficient delivery of nucleic acids, particularly oligonucleotides, to the skin of animals.
  • nucleic acids particularly oligonucleotides
  • Most drugs are present in solution in both ionized and nonionized forms. However, usually only lipid soluble or lipophilic drugs readily cross cell membranes. It has been discovered that even non-lipophilic drugs may cross cell membranes if the membrane to be crossed is treated with a penetration enhancer. In addition to aiding the diffusion of non-lipophilic drugs across cell membranes, penetration enhancers also enhance the permeability of lipophilic drugs.
  • Penetration enhancers may be classified as belonging to one of five broad categories, i.e., surfactants, fatty acids, bile salts, chelating agents, and non-chelating non-surfactants (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p.92). Each of the above mentioned classes of penetration enhancers are described below in greater detail.
  • surfactants are chemical entities which, when dissolved in an aqueous solution, reduce the surface tension of the solution or the interfacial tension between the aqueous solution and another liquid, with the result that absorption of oligonucleotides through the mucosa is enhanced.
  • these penetration enhancers include, for example, sodium lauryl sulfate, polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether and polyoxyethylene-20-cetyl ether) (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p.92); and perfluorochemical emulsions, such as FC-43. Takahashi et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1988, 40, 252).
  • Fatty acids Various fatty acids and their derivatives which act as penetration enhancers include, for example, oleic acid, lauric acid, capric acid (n-decanoic acid), myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein (1-monooleoyl-rac-glycerol), dilaurin, caprylic acid, arachidonic acid, glycerol 1-monocaprate, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, acylcarnitines, acylcholines, C 1-10 alkyl esters thereof (e.g., methyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), and mono- and di-glycerides thereof (i.e., oleate, laurate, caprate, myristate, palmitate, stearate, linoleate, etc.) (
  • Bile salts The physiological role of bile includes the facilitation of dispersion and absorption of lipids and fat-soluble vitamins (Brunton, Chapter 38 in: Goodman & Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th Ed., Hardman et al. Eds., McGraw-Hill, New York, 1996, pp. 934-935).
  • the term “bile salts” includes any of the naturally occurring components of bile as well as any of their synthetic derivatives.
  • the bile salts of the invention include, for example, cholic acid (or its pharmaceutically acceptable sodium salt, sodium cholate), dehydrocholic acid (sodium dehydrocholate), deoxycholic acid (sodium deoxycholate), glucholic acid (sodium glucholate), glycholic acid (sodium glycocholate), glycodeoxycholic acid (sodium glycodeoxycholate), taurocholic acid (sodium taurocholate), taurodeoxycholic acid (sodium taurodeoxycholate), chenodeoxycholic acid (sodium chenodeoxycholate), ursodeoxycholic acid (UDCA), sodium tauro-24,25-dihydro-fusidate (STDHF), sodium glycodihydrofusidate and polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether (POE) (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, page 92; Swinyard, Chapter 39 In: Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences,
  • Chelating agents as used in connection with the present invention, can be defined as compounds that remove metallic ions from solution by forming complexes therewith, with the result that absorption of oligonucleotides through the mucosa is enhanced. With regards to their use as penetration enhancers in the present invention, chelating agents have the added advantage of also serving as DNase inhibitors, as most characterized DNA nucleases require a divalent metal ion for catalysis and are thus inhibited by chelating agents (Jarrett, J. Chromatogr., 1993, 618, 315-339).
  • Chelating agents of the invention include but are not limited to disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate (EDTA), citric acid, salicylates (e.g., sodium salicylate, 5-methoxysalicylate and homovanilate), N-acyl derivatives of collagen, laureth-9 and N-amino acyl derivatives of beta-diketones (enamines)(Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, page 92; Muranishi, Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1990, 7, 1-33; Buur et al., J. Control Rel., 1990, 14, 43-51).
  • EDTA disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate
  • citric acid e.g., citric acid
  • salicylates e.g., sodium salicylate, 5-methoxysalicylate and homovanilate
  • N-acyl derivatives of collagen e.g., laureth-9 and N-amino acyl derivatives
  • Non-chelating non-surfactants As used herein, non-chelating non-surfactant penetration enhancing compounds can be defined as compounds that demonstrate insignificant activity as chelating agents or as surfactants but that nonetheless enhance absorption of oligonucleotides through the alimentary mucosa (Muranishi, Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1990, 7, 1-33).
  • This class of penetration enhancers include, for example, unsaturated cyclic ureas, 1-alkyl- and 1-alkenylazacyclo-alkanone derivatives (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, page 92); and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents such as diclofenac sodium, indomethacin and phenylbutazone (Yamashita et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1987, 39, 621-626).
  • Agents that enhance uptake of oligonucleotides at the cellular level may also be added to the pharmaceutical and other compositions of the present invention.
  • cationic lipids such as lipofectin (Junichi et al, U.S. Pat. No. 5,705,188), cationic glycerol derivatives, and polycationic molecules, such as polylysine (Lollo et al., PCT Application WO 97/30731), are also known to enhance the cellular uptake of oligonucleotides.
  • nucleic acids include glycols such as ethylene glycol and propylene glycol, pyrrols such as 2-pyrrol, azones, and terpenes such as limonene and menthone.
  • glycols such as ethylene glycol and propylene glycol
  • pyrrols such as 2-pyrrol
  • azones such as 2-pyrrol
  • terpenes such as limonene and menthone.
  • compositions of the present invention also incorporate carrier compounds in the formulation.
  • carrier compound or “carrier” can refer to a nucleic acid, or analog thereof, which is inert (i.e., does not possess biological activity per se) but is recognized as a nucleic acid by in vivo processes that reduce the bioavailability of a nucleic acid having biological activity by, for example, degrading the biologically active nucleic acid or promoting its removal from circulation.
  • a nucleic acid and a carrier compound can result in a substantial reduction of the amount of nucleic acid recovered in the liver, kidney or other extracirculatory reservoirs, presumably due to competition between the carrier compound and the nucleic acid for a common receptor.
  • the recovery of a partially phosphorothioate oligonucleotide in hepatic tissue can be reduced when it is coadministered with polyinosinic acid, dextran sulfate, polycytidic acid or 4-acetamido-4′isothiocyano-stilbene-2,2′-disulfonic acid (Miyao et al., Antisense Res. Dev., 1995, 5, 115-121; Takakura et al., Antisense & Nucl. Acid Drug Dev., 1996, 6, 177-183).
  • a “pharmaceutical carrier” or “excipient” is a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent, suspending agent or any other pharmacologically inert vehicle for delivering one or more nucleic acids to an animal.
  • the excipient may be liquid or solid and is selected, with the planned manner of administration in mind, so as to provide for the desired bulk, consistency, etc., when combined with a nucleic acid and the other components of a given pharmaceutical composition.
  • Typical pharmaceutical carriers include, but are not limited to, binding agents (e.g., pregelatinized maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, etc.); fillers (e.g., lactose and other sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, pectin, gelatin, calcium sulfate, ethyl cellulose, polyacrylates or calcium hydrogen phosphate, etc.); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc, silica, colloidal silicon dioxide, stearic acid, metallic stearates, hydrogenated vegetable oils, corn starch, polyethylene glycols, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, etc.); disintegrants (e.g., starch, sodium starch glycolate, etc.); and wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate, etc.).
  • binding agents e.g., pregelatinized maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxyprop
  • compositions of the present invention can also be used to formulate the compositions of the present invention.
  • suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, water, salt solutions, alcohols, polyethylene glycols, gelatin, lactose, amylose, magnesium stearate, talc, silicic acid, viscous paraffin, hydroxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone and the like.
  • Formulations for topical administration of nucleic acids may include sterile and non-sterile aqueous solutions, non-aqueous solutions in common solvents such as alcohols, or solutions of the nucleic acids in liquid or solid oil bases.
  • the solutions may also contain buffers, diluents and other suitable additives.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic excipients suitable for non-parenteral administration which do not deleteriously react with nucleic acids can be used.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include, but are not limited to, water, salt solutions, alcohol, polyethylene glycols, gelatin, lactose, amylose, magnesium stearate, talc, silicic acid, viscous paraffin, hydroxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone and the like.
  • compositions of the present invention may additionally contain other adjunct components conventionally found in pharmaceutical compositions, at their art-established usage levels.
  • the compositions may contain additional, compatible, pharmaceutically-active materials such as, for example, antipruritics, astringents, local anesthetics or anti-inflammatory agents, or may contain additional materials useful in physically formulating various dosage forms of the compositions of the present invention, such as dyes, flavoring agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opacifiers, thickening agents and stabilizers.
  • additional materials useful in physically formulating various dosage forms of the compositions of the present invention such as dyes, flavoring agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opacifiers, thickening agents and stabilizers.
  • such materials when added, should not unduly interfere with the biological activities of the components of the compositions of the present invention.
  • the formulations can be sterilized and, if desired, mixed with auxiliary agents, e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, colorings, flavorings and/or aromatic substances and the like which do not deleteriously interact with the nucleic acid(s) of the formulation.
  • auxiliary agents e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, colorings, flavorings and/or aromatic substances and the like which do not deleteriously interact with the nucleic acid(s) of the formulation.
  • Aqueous suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension including, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, sorbitol and/or dextran.
  • the suspension may also contain stabilizers.
  • compositions containing (a) one or more antisense compounds and (b) one or more other chemotherapeutic agents which function by a non-antisense mechanism.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include but are not limited to daunorubicin, daunomycin, dactinomycin, doxorubicin, epirubicin, idarubicin, esorubicin, bleomycin, mafosfamide, ifosfamide, cytosine arabinoside, bis-chloroethylnitrosurea, busulfan, mitomycin C, actinomycin D, mithramycin, prednisone, hydroxyprogesterone, testosterone, tamoxifen, dacarbazine, procarbazine, hexamethylmelamine, pentamethylmelamine, mitoxantrone, amsacrine, chlorambucil, methylcyclohexylnitrosurea
  • chemotherapeutic agents may be used individually (e.g., 5-FU and oligonucleotide), sequentially (e.g., 5-FU and oligonucleotide for a period of time followed by MTX and oligonucleotide), or in combination with one or more other such chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., 5-FU, MTX and oligonucleotide, or 5-FU, radiotherapy and oligonucleotide).
  • 5-FU and oligonucleotide e.g., 5-FU and oligonucleotide
  • sequentially e.g., 5-FU and oligonucleotide for a period of time followed by MTX and oligonucleotide
  • one or more other such chemotherapeutic agents e.g., 5-FU, MTX and oligonucleotide, or 5-FU, radiotherapy and oligonucleotide.
  • Anti-inflammatory drugs including but not limited to nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs and corticosteroids, and antiviral drugs, including but not limited to ribivirin, vidarabine, acyclovir and ganciclovir, may also be combined in compositions of the invention. See, generally, The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 15th Ed., Berkow et al., eds., 1987, Rahway, N.J., pages 2499-2506 and 46-49, respectively). Other non-antisense chemotherapeutic agents are also within the scope of this invention. Two or more combined compounds may be used together or sequentially.
  • compositions of the invention may contain one or more antisense compounds, particularly oligonucleotides, targeted to a first nucleic acid and one or more additional antisense compounds targeted to a second nucleic acid target.
  • antisense compounds particularly oligonucleotides
  • additional antisense compounds targeted to a second nucleic acid target Numerous examples of antisense compounds are known in the art. Two or more combined compounds may be used together or sequentially.
  • compositions and their subsequent administration is believed to be within the skill of those in the art. Dosing is dependent on severity and responsiveness of the disease state to be treated, with the course of treatment lasting from several days to several months, or until a cure is effected or a diminution of the disease state is achieved. Optimal dosing schedules can be calculated from measurements of drug accumulation in the body of the patient. Persons of ordinary skill can easily determine optimum dosages, dosing methodologies and repetition rates. Optimum dosages may vary depending on the relative potency of individual oligonucleotides, and can generally be estimated based on EC 50 s found to be effective in in vitro and in viva animal models.
  • dosage is from 0.01 ug to 100 g per kg of body weight, and may be given once or more daily, weekly, monthly or yearly, or even once every 2 to 20 years. Persons of ordinary skill in the art can easily estimate repetition rates for dosing based on measured residence times and concentrations of the drug in bodily fluids or tissues. Following successful treatment, it may be desirable to have the patient undergo maintenance therapy to prevent the recurrence of the disease state, wherein the oligonucleotide is administered in maintenance doses, ranging from 0.01 ug to 100 g per kg of body weight, once or more daily, to once every 20 years.
  • 2′-Deoxy and 2′-methoxy beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites were purchased from commercial sources (e.g. Chemgenes, Needham Mass. or Glen Research, Inc. Sterling Va.).
  • Other 2′-O-alkoxy substituted nucleoside amidites are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,506,351, herein incorporated by reference.
  • optimized synthesis cycles were developed that incorporate multiple steps coupling longer wait times relative to standard synthesis cycles.
  • TLC thin layer chromatography
  • MP melting point
  • HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography
  • NMR Nuclear Magnetic Resonance
  • argon Ar
  • methanol MeOH
  • dichloromethane CH 2 Cl 2
  • TAA triethylamine
  • DMF dimethyl formamide
  • EtOAc dimethyl sulfoxide
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • Oligonucleotides containing 5-methyl-2′-deoxycytidine (5-Me-dC) nucleotides were synthesized according to published methods (Sanghvi, et. al., Nucleic Acids Research, 1993, 21, 3197-3203) using commercially available phosphoramidites (Glen Research, Sterling Va. or ChemGenes, Needham Mass.) or prepared as follows:
  • Trimethylsilylchloride (2.1 L, 16.5 mol, 3.0 eq) was added over 30 minutes while maintaining the internal temperature below ⁇ 5° C., followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). Note: the reaction is mildly exothermic and copious hydrochloric acid fumes form over the course of the addition. The reaction was allowed to warm to 0° C. and the reaction progress was confirmed by TLC (EtOAc-hexanes 4:1; R f 0.43 to 0.84 of starting material and silyl product, respectively). Upon completion, triazole (3.05 kg, 44 mol, 8.0 eq) was added the reaction was cooled to ⁇ 20° C. internal temperature (external ⁇ 30° C.).
  • Phosphorous oxychloride (1035 mL, 11.1 mol, 2.01 eq) was added over 60 min so as to maintain the temperature between ⁇ 20° C. and ⁇ 10° C. during the strongly exothermic process, followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L).
  • the reaction was warmed to 0° C. and stirred for 1 h.
  • TLC indicated a complete conversion to the triazole product (R f 0.83 to 0.34 with the product spot glowing in long wavelength UV light).
  • the reaction mixture was a peach-colored thick suspension, which turned darker red upon warming without apparent decomposition.
  • the reaction was cooled to ⁇ 15° C. internal temperature and water (5 L) was slowly added at a rate to maintain the temperature below +10° C.
  • TLC indicated a complete reaction (product R f 0.35 in EtOAc-MeOH 4:1).
  • the reaction solution was concentrated on a rotary evaporator to a dense foam. Each foam was slowly redissolved in warm EtOAc (4 L; 50° C.), combined in a 50 L glass reactor vessel, and extracted with water (2 ⁇ 4L) to remove the triazole by-product. The water was back-extracted with EtOAc (2 L). The organic layers were combined and concentrated to about 8 kg total weight, cooled to 0° C. and seeded with crystalline product.
  • the three crops were dried in a vacuum oven (50° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 24 h) to a constant weight (1750, 600 and 200 g, respectively) and combined to afford 2550 g (85%) of a white crystalline product (MP 215-217° C.) when TLC and NMR spectroscopy indicated purity.
  • the mother liquor still contained mostly product (as determined by TLC) and a small amount of triazole (as determined by NMR spectroscopy), bis DMT product and unidentified minor impurities.
  • the mother liquor can be purified by silica gel chromatography using a gradient of MeOH (0-25%) in EtOAc to further increase the yield.
  • THe product was purified by Biotage column chromatography (5 kg Biotage) prepared with 65:35:1 hexanes-EtOAc-TEA (4L). The crude product (800 g),dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (2 L), was applied to the column. The column was washed with the 65:35:1 solvent mixture (20 kg), then 20:80:1 solvent mixture (10 kg), then 99:1 EtOAc:TEA (17 kg). The fractions containing the product were collected, and any fractions containing the product and impurities were retained to be resubjected to column chromatography. The column was re-equilibrated with the original 65:35:1 solvent mixture (17 kg). A second batch of crude product (840 g) was applied to the column as before.
  • the protected nucleoside N6-benzoyl-2′-deoxy-2′-fluoroadenosine was synthesized utilizing commercially available 9-beta-D-arabinofuranosyladenine as starting material and whereby the 2′-alpha-fluoro atom is introduced by a S N 2-displacement of a 2′-beta-triflate group.
  • N6-benzoyl-9-beta-D-arabinofuranosyladenine was selectively protected in moderate yield as the 3′,5′-ditetrahydropyranyl (THP) intermediate.
  • THP 3′,5′-ditetrahydropyranyl
  • Deprotection of the THP and N6-benzoyl groups was accomplished using standard methodologies to obtain the 5′-dimethoxytrityl-(DMT) and 5′-DMT-3′-phosphoramidite intermediates.
  • TPDS tetraisopropyldisiloxanyl
  • isobutyryl-arabinofuranosylguanosine was prepared as described by Ross et al., (Nucleosides & Nucleosides, 16, 1645, 1997).
  • Deprotection of the TPDS group was followed by protection of the hydroxyl group with THP to give isobutyryl di-THP protected arabinofuranosylguanine.
  • Selective O-deacylation and triflation was followed by treatment of the crude product with fluoride, then deprotection of the THP groups. Standard methodologies were used to obtain the 5′-DMT- and 5′-DMT-3′-phosphoramidites.
  • 2′-deoxy-2′-fluorocytidine was synthesized via amination of 2′-deoxy-2′-fluorouridine, followed by selective protection to give N4-benzoyl-2′-deoxy-2′-fluorocytidine. Standard procedures were used to obtain the 5′-DMT and 5′-DMT-3′phosphoramidites.
  • 2′-O-Methoxyethyl-substituted nucleoside amidites are prepared as follows, or alternatively, as per the methods of Martin, P., (Helvetica Chimica Acta, 1995, 78, 486-504).
  • the brine layer in the 20 L continuous extractor was further extracted for 72 h with recycled chloroform.
  • the chloroform was concentrated to 120 g of oil and this was combined with the mother liquor from the above filtration (225 g), dissolved in brine (250 mL) and extracted once with chloroform (250 mL).
  • the brine solution was continuously extracted and the product was crystallized as described above to afford an additional 178 g of crystalline product containing about 2% of thymine.
  • the combined yield was 1827 g (69.4%).
  • the product was then extracted into the aqueous phase by washing the toluene solution with aqueous sodium hydroxide (0.5N, 16 L and 8 L).
  • aqueous sodium hydroxide 0.5N, 16 L and 8 L.
  • the combined aqueous layer was overlayed with toluene (12 L) and solid citric acid (8 moles, 1270 g) was added with vigorous stirring to lower the pH of the aqueous layer to 5.5 and extract the product into the toluene.
  • the organic layer was washed with water (10 L) and TLC of the organic layer indicated a trace of DMT-O-Me, bis DMT and dimer DMT.
  • the toluene solution was applied to a silica gel column (6 L sintered glass funnel containing approx. 2 kg of silica gel slurried with toluene (2 L) and TEA (25 mL)) and the fractions were eluted with toluene (12 L) and EtOAc (3 ⁇ 4 L) using vacuum applied to a filter flask placed below the column.
  • the first EtOAc fraction containing both the desired product and impurities were resubjected to column chromatography as above.
  • Trimethylsilylchloride (1.60 L, 12.7 mol, 3.0 eq) was added over 30 min. while maintaining the internal temperature below ⁇ 5° C., followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). (Note: the reaction is mildly exothermic and copious hydrochloric acid fumes form over the course of the addition). The reaction was allowed to warm to 0° C. and the reaction progress was confirmed by TLC (EtOAc, R f 0.68 and 0.87 for starting material and silyl product, respectively). Upon completion, triazole (2.34 kg, 33.8 mol, 8.0 eq) was added the reaction was cooled to ⁇ 20° C. internal temperature (external ⁇ 30° C.).
  • Phosphorous oxychloride (793 mL, 8.51 mol, 2.01 eq) was added slowly over 60 min so as to maintain the temperature between ⁇ 20° C. and ⁇ 10° C. (note: strongly exothermic), followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). The reaction was warmed to 0° C. and stirred for 1 h, at which point it was an off-white thick suspension. TLC indicated a complete conversion to the triazole product (EtOAc, R f 0.87 to 0.75 with the product spot glowing in long wavelength UV light). The reaction was cooled to ⁇ 15° C. and water (5 L) was slowly added at a rate to maintain the temperature below +10° C.
  • TLC indicated a complete reaction (CH 2 Cl 2 -acetone-MeOH, 20:5:3, R f 0.51).
  • the reaction solution was concentrated on a rotary evaporator to a dense foam and slowly redissolved in warm CH 2 Cl 2 (4 L, 40° C.) and transferred to a 20 L glass extraction vessel equipped with a air-powered stirrer.
  • the organic layer was extracted with water (2 ⁇ 6 L) to remove the triazole by-product. (Note: In the first extraction an emulsion formed which took about 2 h to resolve).
  • the water layer was back-extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (2 ⁇ 2 L), which in turn was washed with water (3 L).
  • the reaction was quenched by slowly adding then washing with aqueous citric acid (10%, 100 mL over 10 min, then 2 ⁇ 4 L), followed by aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2%, 2 L), water (2 ⁇ 4 L) and brine (4 L).
  • aqueous citric acid 10%, 100 mL over 10 min, then 2 ⁇ 4 L
  • aqueous sodium bicarbonate 2%, 2 L
  • water 2 ⁇ 4 L
  • brine 4 L
  • the organic layer was concentrated on a 20 L rotary evaporator to about 2 L total volume.
  • the residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (6 L Buchner funnel containing 1.5 kg of silica gel wetted with a solution of EtOAc-hexanes-TEA (70:29:1)).
  • the product was eluted with the same solvent (30 L) followed by straight EtOAc (6 L).
  • 2′-(Dimethylaminooxyethoxy) nucleoside amidites are prepared as described in the following paragraphs.
  • Adenosine, cytidine and guanosine nucleoside amidites are prepared similarly to the thymidine (5-methyluridine) except the exocyclic amines are protected with a benzoyl moiety in the case of adenosine and cytidine and with isobutyryl in the case of guanosine.
  • the reaction vessel was cooled to ambient temperature and opened.
  • TLC EtOAc, R f 0.67 for desired product and R f 0.82 for ara-T side product
  • the solution was concentrated under reduced pressure (10 to 1 mm Hg) in a warm water bath (40-100° C.) with the more extreme conditions used to remove the ethylene glycol. (Alternatively, once the THF has evaporated the solution can be diluted with water and the product extracted into EtOAc). The residue was purified by column chromatography (2 kg silica gel, EtOAc-hexanes gradient 1:1 to 4:1).
  • Triethylamine trihydrofluoride (3.91 mL, 24.0 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF and TEA (1.67 mL, 12 mmol, dry, stored over KOH) and added to 5 1 -O-tert-butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[N,N-dimethylaminooxyethyl]-5-methyluridine (1.40 g, 2.4 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 24 hrs and monitored by TLC (5% MeOH in CH 2 Cl 2 ).
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 h under inert atmosphere. The progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC (hexane:EtOAc 1:1). The solvent was evaporated, then the residue was dissolved in EtOAc (70 mL) and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO 3 (40 mL). The EtOAc layer was dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and concentrated.
  • 2′-(Aminooxyethoxy) nucleoside amidites (also known in the art as 2′-O-(aminooxyethyl) nucleoside amidites) are prepared as described in the following paragraphs. Adenosine, cytidine and thymidine nucleoside amidites are prepared similarly.
  • the 2′-O-aminooxyethyl guanosine analog may be obtained by selective 2′-O-alkylation of diaminopurine riboside.
  • Multigram quantities of diaminopurine riboside may be purchased from Schering AG (Berlin) to provide 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl) diaminopurine riboside along with aminor amount of the 3′-O-isomer.
  • 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl) diaminopurine riboside may be resolved and converted to 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)guanosine by treatment with adenosine deaminase.
  • Standard protection procedures should afford 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)-51-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine and 2-N-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine which may be reduced to provide 2-N-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine.
  • the hydroxyl group may be displaced by N-hydroxyphthalimide via a Mitsunobu reaction, and the protected nucleoside may be phosphitylated as usual to yield 2-N-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-([2-phthalmidoxy]ethyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine-3′-[(2-cyanoethyl)-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite].
  • 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy nucleoside amidites also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl, i.e., 2′-O—CH 2 —O—CH 2 —N(CH 2 ) 2 , or 2′-DMAEOE nucleoside amidites
  • 2′-DMAEOE nucleoside amidites are prepared as follows.
  • Other nucleoside amidites are prepared similarly.
  • the crude solution was concentrated, the residue was diluted with water (200 mL) and extracted with hexanes (200 mL). The product was extracted from the aqueous layer with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 200 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed once with water, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (eluted with 5:100:2 MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 /TEA) as the eluent. The appropriate fractions were combined and evaporated to afford the product as a white solid.
  • Unsubstituted and substituted phosphodiester (P ⁇ O) oligonucleotides are synthesized on an automated DNA synthesizer (Applied Biosystems model 394) using standard phosphoramidite chemistry with oxidation by iodine.
  • Phosphorothioates are synthesized similar to phosphodiester oligonucleotides with the following exceptions: thiation was effected by utilizing a 10% w/v solution of 3H-1,2-benzodithiole-3-one 1,1-dioxide in acetonitrile for the oxidation of the phosphite linkages. The thiation reaction step time was increased to 180 sec and preceded by the normal capping step. After cleavage from the CPG column and deblocking in concentrated ammonium hydroxide at 55° C.
  • oligonucleotides (12-16 hr), the oligonucleotides were recovered by precipitating with >3 volumes of ethanol from a 1 M NH 4 oAc solution. Phosphinate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Alkyl phosphonate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863, herein incorporated by reference.
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylene phosphonate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,610,289 or 5,625,050, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Phosphoramidite oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Patent, 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Alkylphosphonothioate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in published PCT applications PCT/US94/00902 and PCT/US93/06976 (published as WO 94/17093 and WO 94/02499, respectively), herein incorporated by reference.
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Phosphotriester oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Methylenemethylimino linked oligonucleosides also identified as MMI linked oligonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MDH linked oligonucleosides, and methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-3 linked oligonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-4 linked oligonucleosides, as well as mixed backbone compounds having, for instance, alternating MMI and P ⁇ O or P ⁇ S linkages are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023, 5,489,677, 5,602,240 and 5,610,289, all of which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • Formacetal and thioformacetal linked oligonucleosides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Ethylene oxide linked oligonucleosides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618, herein incorporated by reference.
  • PNAs Peptide nucleic acids
  • PNA Peptide Nucleic Acids
  • Chimeric oligonucleotides, oligonucleosides or mixed oligonucleotides/oligonucleosides of the invention can be of several different types. These include a first type wherein the “gap” segment of linked nucleosides is positioned between 5′ and 3′ “wing” segments of linked nucleosides and a second “open end” type wherein the “gap” segment is located at either the 3′ or the 5′ terminus of the oligomeric compound. Oligonucleotides of the first type are also known in the art as “gapmers” or gapped oligonucleotides. Oligonucleotides of the second type are also known in the art as “hemimers” or “wingmers”.
  • Chimeric oligonucleotides having 2′-O-alkyl phosphorothioate and 2′-deoxy phosphorothioate oligo-nucleotide segments are synthesized using an Applied Biosystems automated DNA synthesizer Model 394, as above. Oligonucleotides are synthesized using the automated synthesizer and 2′-deoxy-5′-dimethoxytrityl-3′-O-phosphoramidite for the DNA portion and 5′-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-methyl-3′-O-phosphoramidite for 5′ and 3′ wings.
  • the standard synthesis cycle is modified by incorporating coupling steps with increased reaction times for the 5′-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-methyl-3′-O-phosphoramidite.
  • the fully protected oligonucleotide is cleaved from the support and deprotected in concentrated ammonia (NH 4 OH) 12-16 hr at 55° C.
  • the deprotected oligo is then recovered by an appropriate method (precipitation, column chromatography, volume reduced in vacuo and analyzed spetrophotometrically for yeild and for purity by capillary electrophoresis and by mass spectrometry.
  • [0229] [2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)]--[2′-deoxy]--[-2′-O-(methoxyethyl)] chimeric phosphorothioate oligonucleotides were prepared as per the procedure above for the 2′-O-methyl chimeric oligonucleotide, with the substitution of 2′-0-(methoxyethyl) amidites for the 2′-O-methyl amidites.
  • [0231] [2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl phosphodiester]--[2′-deoxy phosphorothioate]--[2′-O-(methoxyethyl) phosphodiester] chimeric oligonucleotides are prepared as per the above procedure for the 2′-O-methyl chimeric oligonucleotide with the substitution of 2′-O-(methoxyethyl) amidites for the 2′-O-methyl amidites, oxidization with iodine to generate the phosphodiester internucleotide linkages within the wing portions of the chimeric structures and sulfurization utilizing 3,H-1,2 benzodithiole-3-one 1,1 dioxide (Beaucage Reagent) to generate the phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages for the center gap.
  • oligonucleotides or oligonucleosides are recovered by precipitation out of 1 M NH 4 OAc with >3 volumes ethanol.
  • Synthesized oligonucleotides were analyzed by electrospray mass spectroscopy (molecular weight determination) and by capillary gel electrophoresis and judged to be at least 70% full length material. The relative amounts of phosphorothioate and phosphodiester linkages obtained in synthesis was determined by the ratio of correct molecular weight relative to the ⁇ 16 amu product (+32+48).
  • Oligonucleotides were synthesized via solid phase P(III) phosphoramidite chemistry on an automated synthesizer capable of assembling 96 sequences simultaneously in a 96 well format.
  • Phosphodiester internucleotide linkages were afforded by oxidation with aqueous iodine.
  • Phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages were generated by sulfurization utilizing 3,H-1,2 benzodithiole-3-one 1,1 dioxide (Beaucage Reagent) in anhydrous acetonitrile.
  • Standard base-protected beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites were purchased from commercial vendors (e.g.
  • Non-standard nucleosides are synthesized as per known literature or patented methods. They are utilized as base protected beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites.
  • Oligonucleotides were cleaved from support and deprotected with concentrated NH 4 OH at elevated temperature (55-60° C.) for 12-16 hours and the released product then dried in vacuo. The dried product was then re-suspended in sterile water to afford a master plate from which all analytical and test plate samples are then diluted utilizing robotic pipettors.
  • oligonucleotide concentration was assessed by dilution of samples and UV absorption spectroscopy.
  • the full-length integrity of the individual products was evaluated by capillary electrophoresis (CE) in either the 96 well format (Beckman P/ACETM MDQ) or, for individually prepared samples, on a commercial CE apparatus (e.g., Beckman P/ACETM 5000, ABI 270). Base and backbone composition was confirmed by mass analysis of the compounds utilizing electrospray-mass spectroscopy. All assay test plates were diluted from the master plate using single and multi-channel robotic pipettors. Plates were judged to be acceptable if at least 85% of the compounds on the plate were at least 85% full length.
  • the effect of antisense compounds on target nucleic acid expression can be tested in any of a variety of cell types provided that the target nucleic acid is present at measurable levels. This can be routinely determined using, for example, PCR or Northern blot analysis. The following cell types are provided for illustrative purposes, but other cell types can be routinely used, provided that the target is expressed in the cell type chosen. This can be readily determined by methods routine in the art, for example Northern blot analysis, Ribonuclease protection assays, or RT-PCR.
  • T-24 Cells [0242] T-24 Cells:
  • the human transitional cell bladder carcinoma cell line T-24 was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) (Manassas, Va.). T-24 cells were routinely cultured in complete McCoy's 5A basal media (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum ((Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.), penicillin 100 units per mL, and streptomycin 100 micrograms per mL (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.). Cells were routinely passaged by trypsinization and dilution when they reached 90% confluence. Cells were seeded into 96-well plates (Falcon-Primaria #3872) at a density of 7000 cells/well for use in RT-PCR analysis.
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • cells may be seeded onto 100 mm or other standard tissue culture plates and treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of medium and oligonucleotide.
  • the human lung carcinoma cell line A549 was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) (Manassas, Va.). A549 cells were routinely cultured in DMEM basal media (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.), penicillin 100 units per mL, and streptomycin 100 micrograms per mL (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.). Cells were routinely passaged by trypsinization and dilution when they reached 90% confluence.
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • NHDF Human neonatal dermal fibroblast
  • HEK Human embryonic keratinocytes
  • Clonetics Corporation Walkersville, Md.
  • HEKs were routinely maintained in Keratinocyte Growth Medium (Clonetics Corporation, Walkersville, Md.) formulated as recommended by the supplier.
  • Cells were routinely maintained for up to 10 passages as recommended by the supplier.
  • THP-1 Cells [0251] THP-1 Cells:
  • the acute monocytic leukemia cell line, THP-1 was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) (Manassas, Va.). The cells are routinely cultured at 37° C. in ATCC medium: RPMI 1640 medium with 2 mM L-glutamine adjusted to contain 1.5 g/L sodium bicarbonate, 4.5 g/L glucose, 10 mM HEPES and 1.0 mM sodium pyruvate and supplemented with 20% fetal bovine serum.
  • THP-1 cells are suspension cells and are therefore treated via electroporation.
  • 90 ul volumes of cell suspension are treated with 20 ul of 50 uM oligonucleotide (total concentration of 10 uM).
  • This mixture is then transferred to a 1 mm gap cuvette.
  • 75 V is applied to the cuvette for 6 msec, after which, 800 ul growth media (RPMI) is added and mixed in the cuvette.
  • 800 ul of this mixture is then transferred to a 24-well plate already containing 1 mL of growth media (RPMI) in each well (to give a total volume of 1.9 mL).
  • RNA harvested from these mixtures is used in the standard RT-PCR assay.
  • the concentration of oligonucleotide used varies from cell line to cell line. To determine the optimal oligonucleotide concentration for a particular cell line, the cells are treated with a positive control oligonucleotide at a range of concentrations.
  • the positive control oligonucleotide is ISIS 13920, TCCGTCATCGCTCCTCAGGG, SEQ ID NO: 1, a 2′-O-methoxyethyl gapmer (2′-O-methoxyethyls shown in bold) with a phosphorothioate backbone which is targeted to human H-ras.
  • the positive control oligonucleotide is ISIS 15770, ATGCATTCTGCCCCCAAGGA, SEQ ID NO: 2, a 2′-O-methoxyethyl gapmer (2′-O-methoxyethyls shown in bold) with a phosphorothioate backbone which is targeted to both mouse and rat c-raf.
  • concentration of positive control oligonucleotide that results in 80% inhibition of c-Ha-ras (for ISIS 13920) or c-raf (for ISIS 15770) mRNA is then utilized as the screening concentration for-new oligonucleotides in subsequent experiments for that cell line.
  • the lowest concentration of positive control oligonucleotide that results in 60% inhibition of H-ras or c-raf mRNA is then utilized as the oligonucleotide screening concentration in subsequent experiments for that cell line. If 60% inhibition is not achieved, that particular cell line is deemed as unsuitable for oligonucleotide transfection experiments.
  • hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression can be assayed in a variety of ways known in the art.
  • hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels can be quantitated by, e.g., Northern blot analysis, competitive polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or real-time PCR (RT-PCR). Real-time quantitative PCR is presently preferred.
  • RNA analysis can be performed on total cellular RNA or poly(A)+ mRNA. The preferred method of RNA analysis of the present invention is the use of total cellular RNA as described in other examples herein. Methods of RNA isolation are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M.
  • Protein levels of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 can be quantitated in a variety of ways well known in the art, such as immunoprecipitation, Western blot analysis (immunoblotting), ELISA or fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • Antibodies directed to hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 can be identified and obtained from a variety of sources, such as the MSRS catalog of antibodies (Aerie Corporation, Birmingham, Mich.), or can be prepared via conventional antibody generation methods. Methods for preparation of polyclonal antisera are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp.
  • Immunoprecipitation methods are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp. 10.16.1-10.16.11, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998.
  • Western blot (immunoblot) analysis is standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp. 10.8.1-10.8.21, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997.
  • Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays ELISA are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp. 11.2.1-11.2.22, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1991.
  • Poly(A)+ mRNA was isolated according to Miura et al., Clin. Chem., 1996, 42, 1758-1764. Other methods for poly(A)+ mRNA isolation are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 1, pp. 4.5.1-4.5.3, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1993. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium was removed from the cells and each well was washed with 200 ⁇ L cold PBS.
  • lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaCl, 0.5% NP-40, 20 mM vanadyl-ribonucleoside complex) was added to each well, the plate was gently agitated and then incubated at room temperature for five minutes. 55 ⁇ L of lysate was transferred to Oligo d(T) coated 96-well plates (AGCT Inc., Irvine Calif.). Plates were incubated for 60 minutes at room temperature, washed 3 times with 200 ⁇ L of wash buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.3 M NaCl).
  • the plate was blotted on paper towels to remove excess wash buffer and then air-dried for 5 minutes.
  • 60 ⁇ L of elution buffer (5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6), preheated to 70° C. was added to each well, the plate was incubated on a 90° C. hot plate for 5 minutes, and the eluate was then transferred to a fresh 96-well plate.
  • the repetitive pipetting and elution steps may be automated using a QIAGEN Bio-Robot 9604 (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia Calif.). Essentially, after lysing of the cells on the culture plate, the plate is transferred to the robot deck where the pipetting, DNase treatment and elution steps are carried out.
  • Quantitation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels was determined by real-time quantitative PCR using the ABI PRISMTM 7700 Sequence Detection System (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) according to manufacturer's instructions. This is a closed-tube, non-gel-based, fluorescence detection system which allows high-throughput quantitation of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) products in real-time. As opposed to standard PCR, in which amplification products are quantitated after the PCR is completed, products in real-time quantitative PCR are quantitated as they accumulate.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • reporter dye e.g., FAM, obtained from either Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, CA or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa
  • a quencher dye e.g., TAMRA, obtained from either Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa
  • annealing of the probe to the target sequence creates a substrate that can be cleaved by the 5′-exonuclease activity of Taq polymerase.
  • cleavage of the probe by Taq polymerase releases the reporter dye from the remainder of the probe (and hence from the quencher moiety) and a sequence-specific fluorescent signal is generated.
  • additional reporter dye molecules are cleaved from their respective probes, and the fluorescence intensity is monitored at regular intervals by laser optics built into the ABI PRISMTM 7700 Sequence Detection System.
  • a series of parallel reactions containing serial dilutions of mRNA from untreated control samples generates a standard curve that is used to quantitate the percent inhibition after antisense oligonucleotide treatment of test samples.
  • primer-probe sets specific to the target gene being measured are evaluated for their ability to be “multiplexed” with a GAPDH amplification reaction.
  • multiplexing both the target gene and the internal standard gene GAPDH are amplified concurrently in a single sample.
  • mRNA isolated from untreated cells is serially diluted. Each dilution is amplified in the presence of primer-probe sets specific for GAPDH only, target gene only (“single-plexing”), or both (multiplexing).
  • standard curves of GAPDH and target mRNA signal as a function of dilution are generated from both the single-plexed and multiplexed samples.
  • the primer-probe set specific for that target is deemed multiplexable.
  • Other methods of PCR are also known in the art.
  • PCR reagents were obtained from Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif. RT-PCR reactions were carried out by adding 20 ⁇ L PCR cocktail (2.5 ⁇ PCR buffer (—MgCl 2 ), 6.6 mM MgCl 2 , 375 ⁇ M each of DATP, dCTP, dCTP and dGTP, 375 nM each of forward primer and reverse primer, 125 nM of probe, 4 Units RNAse inhibitor, 1.25 Units PLATINUM® Taq, 5 Units MuLV reverse transcriptase, and 2.5 ⁇ ROX dye) to 96 well plates containing 30 ⁇ L total RNA solution. The RT reaction was carried out by incubation for 30 minutes at 48° C.
  • PCR cocktail 2.5 ⁇ PCR buffer (—MgCl 2 ), 6.6 mM MgCl 2 , 375 ⁇ M each of DATP, dCTP, dCTP and dGTP, 375 nM each of forward primer and reverse primer, 125 n
  • Gene target quantities obtained by real time RT-PCR are normalized using either the expression level of GAPDH, a gene whose expression is constant, or by quantifying total RNA using RiboGreenTM (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.).
  • GAPDH expression is quantified by real time RT-PCR, by being run simultaneously with the target, multiplexing, or separately.
  • Total RNA is quantified using RiboGreenTM RNA quantification reagent from Molecular Probes. Methods of RNA quantification by RiboGreenTM are taught in Jones, L. J., et al, Analytical Biochemistry, 1998, 265, 368-374.
  • RiboGreenTM working reagent 170 ⁇ L of RiboGreenTM working reagent (RiboGreenTM reagent diluted 1:350 in 10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 7.5) is pipetted into a 96-well plate containing 30 ⁇ L purified, cellular RNA. The plate is read in a CytoFluor 4000 (PE Applied Biosystems) with excitation at 480 nm and emission at 520 nm.
  • CytoFluor 4000 PE Applied Biosystems
  • Probes and primers to human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 were designed to hybridize to a human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 sequence, using published sequence information (GenBank accession number NM — 005525.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO:3).
  • PCR primers were: forward primer: GTTTCTGGGATAGTCCATATGCAA (SEQ ID NO: 4) reverse primer: AGCTCCCCCTTTGATGATCTC (SEQ ID NO: 5) and the PCR probe was: FAM-CAGCTCCAAAGGAGGAATGTGCCCT-TAMRA (SEQ ID NO: 6) where FAM (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye.
  • FAM PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.
  • TAMRA PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.
  • forward primer GAAGGTGAAGGTCGGAGTC(SEQ ID NO:7)
  • reverse primer GAAGATGGTGATGGGATTTC (SEQ ID NO:8) and the PCR probe was: 5′ JOE-CAAGCTTCCCGTTCTCAGCC-TAMRA 3′ (SEQ ID NO: 9) where JOE (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye.
  • Probes and primers to mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 were designed to hybridize to a mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 sequence, using published sequence information (GenBank accession number X83202.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO:10).
  • PCR primers were: forward primer: GGCGGACTGGACATGCTT (SEQ ID NO:11) reverse primer: GAGTGGATGTCGTCATGGAAGA (SEQ ID NO: 12) and the PCR probe was: FAM-TTCTAAACCACATCACTCAGACCTCGCTGTC-TAMRA (SEQ ID NO: 13) where FAM (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye.
  • FAM PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.
  • TAMRA PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.
  • forward primer GGCAAATTCAACGGCACAGT (SEQ ID NO:14)
  • reverse primer GGGTCTCGCTCCTGGAAGAT (SEQ ID NO:15) and the PCR probe was: 5′ JOE-AAGGCCGAGAATGGGAAGCTTGTCATC-TAMRA 3′ (SEQ ID NO: 16) where JOE (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye.
  • RNAZOLTM TEL-TEST “B” Inc., Friendswood, Tex.
  • Total RNA was prepared following manufacturer's recommended protocols. Twenty micrograms of total RNA was fractionated by electrophoresis through 1.2% agarose gels containing 1.1% formaldehyde using a MOPS buffer system (AMRESCO, Inc. Solon, Ohio).
  • a human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 specific probe was prepared by PCR using the forward primer GTTTCTGGGATAGTCCATATGCAA (SEQ ID NO: 4) and the reverse primer AGCTCCCCCTTTGATGATCTC (SEQ ID NO: 5).
  • GTTTCTGGGATAGTCCATATGCAA SEQ ID NO: 4
  • AGCTCCCCCTTTGATGATCTC SEQ ID NO: 5
  • mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 specific probe was prepared by PCR using the forward primer GGCGGACTGGACATGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 11) and the reverse primer GAGTGGATGTCGTCATGGAAGA (SEQ ID NO: 12).
  • GPDH mouse glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase
  • Hybridized membranes were visualized and quantitated using a PHOSPHORIMAGERTM and IMAGEQUANTTM Software V3.3 (Molecular Dynamics, Sunnyvale, Calif.). Data was normalized to GAPDH levels in untreated controls.
  • oligonucleotides were designed to target different regions of the human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 RNA, using published sequences (GenBank accession number NM — 005525.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO: 3).
  • the oligonucleotides are shown in Table 1. “Target site” indicates the first (5′-most) nucleotide number on the particular target sequence to which the oligonucleotide binds.
  • All compounds in Table 1 are chimeric oligonucleotides (“gapmers”) 20 nucleotides in length, composed of a central “gap” region consisting of ten 2′-deoxynucleotides, which is flanked on both sides (5′ and 3′ directions) by five-nucleotide “wings”.
  • the wings are composed of 2′-methoxyethyl (2′-MOE)nucleotides.
  • the internucleoside (backbone) linkages are phosphorothioate (P ⁇ S) throughout the oligonucleotide. All cytidine residues are 5-methylcytidines.
  • the compounds were analyzed for their effect on human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels by quantitative real-time PCR as described in other examples herein. Data are averages from two experiments. If present, “N.D.” indicates “no data”.
  • SEQ ID NOs 18, 20, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52 and 53 demonstrated at least 51% inhibition of human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression in this assay and are therefore preferred.
  • the target sites to which these preferred sequences are complementary are herein referred to as “active sites” and are therefore preferred sites for targeting by compounds of the present invention.
  • oligonucleotides were designed to target different regions of the mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 RNA, using a published sequence (GenBank accession number X83202.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO: 10).
  • the oligonucleotides are shown in Table 2. “Target site” indicates the first (5′-most) nucleotide number on the particular target sequence to which the oligonucleotide binds.
  • All compounds in Table 2 are chimeric oligonucleotides (“gapmers”) 20 nucleotides in length, composed of a central “gap” region consisting of ten 2′-deoxynucleotides, which is flanked on both sides (5′ and 3′ directions) by five-nucleotide “wings”.
  • the wings are composed of 2′-methoxyethyl (2′-MOE)nucleotides.
  • the internucleoside (backbone) linkages are phosphorothioate (P ⁇ S) throughout the oligonucleotide. All cytidine residues are 5-methylcytidines.
  • the compounds were analyzed for their effect on mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels by quantitative real-time PCR as described in other examples herein. Data are averages from two experiments. If present, “N.D.” indicates “no data”.
  • SEQ ID NOs 22, 79, 80, 88, 92, 96, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 116, 119, 120 and 121 demonstrated at least 40% inhibition of mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression in this experiment and are therefore preferred.
  • the target sites to which these preferred sequences are complementary are herein referred to as “active sites” and are therefore preferred sites for targeting by compounds of the present invention.

Landscapes

  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Steroid Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Antisense compounds, compositions and methods are provided for modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. The compositions comprise antisense compounds, particularly antisense oligonucleotides, targeted to nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. Methods of using these compounds for modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression and for treatment of diseases associated with expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 are provided.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention provides compositions and methods for modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. In particular, this invention relates to compounds, particularly oligonucleotides, specifically hybridizable with nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. Such compounds have been shown to modulate the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. [0001]
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The adrenal gland produces three kinds of steroid hormones: glucocorticoids, mineralocorticoids and adrenal androgens. Cortisol and corticosterone are the essential human glucocorticoids which play important roles in salt and water homeostasis and blood pressure control. Clinical conditions arising from an excess or deficiency of glucocorticoids or mineralocorticoids include Cushing's syndrome, primary aldosteronism, Addison's disease and congenital adrenal hyperplasia (Shimojo and Stewart, [0002] J. Endocrinol. Invest., 1995, 18, 518-532).
  • Obesity is associated with adverse metabolic consequences such as diabetes and dyslipidemia. One identified cause of viceral obesity and metabolic complications is exposure to excessive levels of glucocorticoids (Bjorntorp and Rosmond, [0003] Nutrition, 2000, 16, 924-936).
  • The enzyme hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 (also known as HSD11B1, HSD-11 and 11-beta-OHSD) plays a pivotal role in determining intracellular glucocorticoid concentrations by regenerating active glucocorticoid (cortisol in humans, corticosterone in rats and mice) from inactive cortisone and 11-dehydrocorticosterone and has been suggested to serve as a tissue-specific amplifier of gucocorticoid action (Bjorntorp and Rosmond, [0004] Nutrition, 2000, 16, 924-936).
  • Hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 has been cloned and mapped to chromosome 1q32-q34 (Tannin et al., [0005] J. Biol. Chem., 1991, 266, 16653-16658). It is widely expressed, most notably in liver, lung, adipose tissue, vasculature, ovary and the central nervous system (Seckl and Walker, Endocrinology, 2001, 142, 1371-1376).
  • Rask et al. have recently demonstrated elevated levels of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 activity in adipose tissue from obese humans and impaired activity in the liver (Rask et al., [0006] J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab., 2001, 86, 1418-1421).
  • Masuzaki et al. have created transgenic mice which overexpress hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 selectively in adipose tissue to an extent similar to that found in adipose tissue of obese humans. These mice had increased adipose levels of corticosterone and developed visceral obesity that was exaggerated by a high-fat diet. The mice also exhibited pronounced insulin-resistant diabetes and hyperlipidemia, leading to a proposal that increased adipocyte hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 activity may be a common molecular etiology for visceral obesity (Masuzaki et al., [0007] Science, 2001, 294, 2166-2170).
  • Mice homozygous for a targeted deletion of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 gene are viable and developmentally normal but cannot regenerate active corticosterone from inert 11-dehydrocorticosterone in vivo, demonstrating that hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is the sole 11-beta-reductase in the body (Kotelevtsev et al., [0008] Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 1997, 94, 14924-14929). The hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1-deficient mice show attenuated activation of glucocorticoid-sensitive hepatic gluconeogenic enzymes in response to stress or high-fat diets and have a disease resistant phenotype (Kotelevtsev et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 1997, 94, 14924-14929).
  • The thiazolidinedione (TZD) class of antidiabetic agents that are ligands for peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor-gamma have been shown to reduce adipocyte hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA and activity both in vivo and in vitro. Because TZDs preferentially reduce visceral fat accumulation in humans, suppression of adipose hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 by TZDs could be a mechanism for this fat redistribution and may play a role in their antidiabetic effects (Berger et al., [0009] J. Biol. Chem., 2001, 276, 12629-12635).
  • These findings strongly suggest that increased adipocyte hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is a common molecular mechanism for visceral obesity and diabetes and may be an appropriate pharmaceutical target for the treatment of these disorders. [0010]
  • In addition to the TZD class of antidiabetic agents discussed above, other known small molecule inhibitors of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 include glycyrrhetinic acid and carbenoxolone (MacKenzie et al., [0011] J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab., 1990, 70, 1637-1643; Stewart et al., Clin. Sci., 1990, 78, 49-54).
  • Disclosed and claimed in PCT publication WO 01/90093 is the use of 2-aminothiazole-derivatives as inhibitors of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 in the manufacture of medicaments for the prevention, management or treatment of diabetes, syndrome X, obesity, glaucoma, hyperlipidemia, hyperinsulinemia, osteoporosis, tuberculosis, depression, virus diseases and inflammatory disorders (Nilsson, 2001). [0012]
  • Disclosed and claimed in PCT publication WO 01/30383 is a medicament comprising hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 antisense oligonucleotides combined with an antigen in order to improve and optimize tolerance induction (Wilckens, 2001). [0013]
  • Antisense phosphorothioate oligonucleotides targeting the start codon of human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 have been employed in investigations of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 activity and effects on vascular contractile response and glucocorticoid metabolism in human vascular tissue (Hatakeyama et al., [0014] Front. Sci. Ser., 2000, 29, 173-174; Souness et al., Steroids, 2002, 67, 195-201). Currently, there are no known therapeutic agents that effectively inhibit the synthesis of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. To date, investigative strategies aimed at modulating hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression have involved the use of small molecule inhibitors, gene knock-outs in mice and antisense oligonucleotides. Consequently, there remains a long felt need for additional agents capable of effectively inhibiting hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 function.
  • Antisense technology is emerging as an effective means for reducing the expression of specific gene products and may therefore prove to be uniquely useful in a number of therapeutic, diagnostic, and research applications for the modulation of expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. [0015]
  • The present invention provides compositions and methods for modulating expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. [0016]
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention is directed to compounds, particularly antisense oligonucleotides, which are targeted to a nucleic acid encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, and which modulate the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. Pharmaceutical and other compositions comprising the compounds of the invention are also provided. Further provided are methods of modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 in cells or tissues comprising contacting said cells or tissues with one or more of the antisense compounds or compositions of the invention. Further provided are methods of treating an animal, particularly a human, suspected of having or being prone to a disease or condition associated with expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 by administering a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of one or more of the antisense compounds or compositions of the invention. [0017]
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention employs oligomeric compounds, particularly antisense oligonucleotides, for use in modulating the function of nucleic acid molecules encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, ultimately modulating the amount of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 produced. This is accomplished by providing antisense compounds which specifically hybridize with one or more nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. As used herein, the terms “target nucleic acid” and “nucleic acid encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1” encompass DNA encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, RNA (including pre-mRNA and mRNA) transcribed from such DNA, and also cDNA derived from such RNA. The specific hybridization of an oligomeric compound with its target nucleic acid interferes with the normal function of the nucleic acid. This modulation of function of a target nucleic acid by compounds which specifically hybridize to it is generally referred to as “antisense”. The functions of DNA to be interfered with include replication and transcription. The functions of RNA to be interfered with include all vital functions such as, for example, translocation of the RNA to the site of protein translation, translocation of the RNA to sites within the cell which are distant from the site of RNA synthesis, translation of protein from the RNA, splicing of the RNA to yield one or more mRNA species, and catalytic activity which may be engaged in or facilitated by the RNA. The overall effect of such interference with target nucleic acid function is modulation of the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. In the context of the present invention, “modulation” means either an increase (stimulation) or a decrease (inhibition) in the expression of a gene. In the context of the present invention, inhibition is the preferred form of modulation of gene expression and mRNA is a preferred target. [0018]
  • It is preferred to target specific nucleic acids for antisense. “Targeting” an antisense compound to a particular nucleic acid, in the context of this invention, is a multistep process. The process usually begins with the identification of a nucleic acid sequence whose function is to be modulated. This may be, for example, a cellular gene (or mRNA transcribed from the gene) whose expression is associated with a particular disorder or disease state, or a nucleic acid molecule from an infectious agent. In the present invention, the target is a nucleic acid molecule encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1. The targeting process also includes determination of a site or sites within this gene for the antisense interaction to occur such that the desired effect, e.g., detection or modulation of expression of the protein, will result. Within the context of the present invention, a preferred intragenic site is the region encompassing the translation initiation or termination codon of the open reading frame (ORF) of the gene. Since, as is known in the art, the translation initiation codon is typically 5′-AUG (in transcribed mRNA molecules; 5′-ATG in the corresponding DNA molecule), the translation initiation codon is also referred to as the “AUG codon,” the “start codon” or the “AUG start codon”. A minority of genes have a translation initiation codon having the RNA sequence 5′-GUG, 5′-UUG or 5′-CUG, and 5′-AUA, 5′-ACG and 5′-CUG have been shown to function in vivo. Thus, the terms “translation initiation codon” and “start codon” can encompass many codon sequences, even though the initiator amino acid in each instance is typically methionine (in eukaryotes) or formylmethionine (in prokaryotes). It is also known in the art that eukaryotic and prokaryotic genes may have two or more alternative start codons, any one of which may be preferentially utilized for translation initiation in a particular cell type or tissue, or under a particular set of conditions. In the context of the invention, “start codon” and “translation initiation codon” refer to the codon or codons that are used in vivo to initiate translation of an mRNA molecule transcribed from a gene encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, regardless of the sequence(s) of such codons. [0019]
  • It is also known in the art that a translation termination codon (or “stop codon”) of a gene may have one of three sequences, i.e., 5′-UAA, 5′-UAG and 5[0020] 1-UGA (the corresponding DNA sequences are 5′-TAA, 5′-TAG and 5′-TGA, respectively). The terms “start codon region” and “translation initiation codon region” refer to a portion of such an mRNA or gene that encompasses from about 25 to about 50 contiguous nucleotides in either direction (i.e., 5′ or 3′) from a translation initiation codon. Similarly, the terms “stop codon region” and “translation termination codon region” refer to a portion of such an mRNA or gene that encompasses from about 25 to about 50 contiguous nucleotides in either direction (i.e., 5′ or 3′) from a translation termination codon.
  • The open reading frame (ORF) or “coding region,” which is known in the art to refer to the region between the translation initiation codon and the translation termination codon, is also a region which may be targeted effectively. Other target regions include the 5′ untranslated region (5′UTR), known in the art to refer to the portion of an mRNA in the 5′ direction from the translation initiation codon, and thus including nucleotides between the 5′ cap site and the translation initiation codon of an mRNA or corresponding nucleotides on the gene, and the 3′ untranslated region (3′UTR), known in the art to refer to the portion of an mRNA in the 3′ direction from the translation termination codon, and thus including nucleotides between the translation termination codon and 3′ end of an mRNA or corresponding nucleotides on the gene. The 5′ cap of an mRNA comprises an N7-methylated guanosine residue joined to the 5[0021] 1-most residue of the mRNA via a 5′-5′ triphosphate linkage. The 5′ cap region of an mRNA is considered to include the 5′ cap structure itself as well as the first 50 nucleotides adjacent to the cap. The 5′ cap region may also be a preferred target region.
  • Although some eukaryotic mRNA transcripts are directly translated, many contain one or more regions, known as “introns,” which are excised from a transcript before it is translated. The remaining (and therefore translated) regions are known as “exons” and are spliced together to form a continuous mRNA sequence. mRNA splice sites, i.e., intron-exon junctions, may also be preferred target regions, and are particularly useful in situations where aberrant splicing is implicated in disease, or where an overproduction of a particular mRNA splice product is implicated in disease. Aberrant fusion junctions due to rearrangements or deletions are also preferred targets. mRNA transcripts produced via the process of splicing of two (or more) mRNAs from different gene sources are known as “fusion transcripts”. It has also been found that introns can also be effective, and therefore preferred, target regions for antisense compounds targeted, for example, to DNA or pre-mRNA. [0022]
  • It is also known in the art that alternative RNA transcripts can be produced from the same genomic region of DNA. These alternative transcripts are generally known as “variants”. More specifically, “pre-mRNA variants” are transcripts produced from the same genomic DNA that differ from other transcripts produced from the same genomic DNA in either their start or stop position and contain both intronic and extronic regions. [0023]
  • Upon excision of one or more exon or intron regions or portions thereof during splicing, pre-mRNA variants produce smaller “mRNA variants”. Consequently, mRNA variants are processed pre-mRNA variants and each unique pre-mRNA variant must always produce a unique mRNA variant as a result of splicing. These mRNA variants are also known as “alternative splice variants”. If no splicing of the pre-mRNA variant occurs then the pre-mRNA variant is identical to the mRNA variant. [0024]
  • It is also known in the art that variants can be produced through the use of alternative signals to start or stop transcription and that pre-mRNAs and mRNAs can possess more that one start codon or stop codon. Variants that originate from a pre-mRNA or mRNA that use alternative start codons are known as “alternative start variants” of that pre-mRNA or mRNA. Those transcripts that use an alternative stop codon are known as “alternative stop variants” of that pre-mRNA or mRNA. One specific type of alternative stop variant is the “polyA variant” in which the multiple transcripts produced result from the alternative selection of one of the “polyA stop signals” by the transcription machinery, thereby producing transcripts that terminate at unique polyA sites. [0025]
  • Once one or more target sites have been identified, oligonucleotides are chosen which are sufficiently complementary to the target, i.e., hybridize sufficiently well and with sufficient specificity, to give the desired effect. [0026]
  • In the context of this invention, “hybridization” means hydrogen bonding, which may be Watson-Crick, Hoogsteen or reversed Hoogsteen hydrogen bonding, between complementary nucleoside or nucleotide bases. For example, adenine and thymine are complementary nucleobases which pair through the formation of hydrogen bonds. “Complementary,” as used herein, refers to the capacity for precise pairing between two nucleotides. For example, if a nucleotide at a certain position of an oligonucleotide is capable of hydrogen bonding with a nucleotide at the same position of a DNA or RNA molecule, then the oligonucleotide and the DNA or RNA are considered to be complementary to each other at that position. The oligonucleotide and the DNA or RNA are complementary to each other when a sufficient number of corresponding positions in each molecule are occupied by nucleotides which can hydrogen bond with each other. Thus, “specifically hybridizable” and “complementary” are terms which are used to indicate a sufficient degree of complementarity or precise pairing such that stable and specific binding occurs between the oligonucleotide and the DNA or RNA target. It is understood in the art that the sequence of an antisense compound need not be 100% complementary to that of its target nucleic acid to be specifically hybridizable. An antisense compound is specifically hybridizable when binding of the compound to the target DNA or RNA molecule interferes with the normal function of the target DNA or RNA to cause a loss of utility, and there is a sufficient degree of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the antisense compound to non-target sequences under conditions in which specific binding is desired, i.e., under physiological conditions in the case of in vivo assays or therapeutic treatment, and in the case of in vitro assays, under conditions in which the assays are performed. [0027]
  • Antisense and other compounds of the invention which hybridize to the target and inhibit expression of the target are identified through experimentation, and the sequences of these compounds are hereinbelow identified as preferred embodiments of the invention. The target sites to which these preferred sequences are complementary are hereinbelow referred to as “active sites” and are therefore preferred sites for targeting. Therefore another embodiment of the invention encompasses compounds which hybridize to these active sites, including oligonucleotide probes and primers. [0028]
  • Antisense compounds are commonly used as research reagents and diagnostics. For example, antisense oligonucleotides, which are able to inhibit gene expression with exquisite specificity, are often used by those of ordinary skill to elucidate the function of particular genes. Antisense compounds are also used, for example, to distinguish between functions of various members of a biological pathway. Antisense modulation has, therefore, been harnessed for research use. [0029]
  • For use in kits and diagnostics, the antisense compounds of the present invention, either alone or in combination with other antisense compounds or therapeutics, can be used as tools in differential and/or combinatorial analyses to elucidate expression patterns of a portion or the entire complement of genes expressed within cells and tissues. [0030]
  • Expression patterns within cells or tissues treated with one or more antisense compounds are compared to control cells or tissues not treated with antisense compounds and the patterns produced are analyzed for differential levels of gene expression as they pertain, for example, to disease association, signaling pathway, cellular localization, expression level, size, structure or function of the genes examined. These analyses can be performed on stimulated or unstimulated cells and in the presence or absence of other compounds which affect expression patterns. [0031]
  • Examples of methods of gene expression analysis known in the art include DNA arrays or microarrays (Brazma and Vilo, [0032] FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 17-24; Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16), SAGE (serial analysis of gene expression) (Madden, et al., Drug Discov. Today, 2000, 5, 415-425), READS (restriction enzyme amplification of digested cDNAs) (Prashar and Weissman, Methods Enzymol., 1999, 303, 258-72), TOGA (total gene expression analysis) (Sutcliffe, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 2000, 97, 1976-81), protein arrays and proteomics (Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16; Jungblut, et al., Electrophoresis, 1999, 20, 2100-10), expressed sequence tag (EST) sequencing (Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16; Larsson, et al., J. Biotechnol., 2000, 80, 143-57), subtractive RNA fingerprinting (SuRF) (Fuchs, et al., Anal. Biochem., 2000, 286, 91-98; Larson, et al., Cytometry, 2000, 41, 203-208), subtractive cloning, differential display (DD) (Jurecic and Belmont, Curr. Opin. Microbiol., 2000, 3, 316-21), comparative genomic hybridization (Carulli, et al., J. Cell Biochem. Suppl., 1998, 31, 286-96), FISH (fluorescent in situ hybridization) techniques (Going and Gusterson, Eur. J. Cancer, 1999, 35, 1895-904) and mass spectrometry methods (reviewed in (To, Comb. Chem. High Throughput Screen, 2000, 3, 235-41).
  • The specificity and sensitivity of antisense is also harnessed by those of skill in the art for therapeutic uses. Antisense oligonucleotides have been employed as therapeutic moieties in the treatment of disease states in animals and man. Antisense oligonucleotide drugs, including ribozymes, have been safely and effectively administered to humans and numerous clinical trials are presently underway. It is thus established that oligonucleotides can be useful therapeutic modalities that can be configured to be useful in treatment regimes for treatment of cells, tissues and animals, especially humans. [0033]
  • In the context of this invention, the term “oligonucleotide” refers to an oligomer or polymer of ribonucleic acid (RNA) or deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or mimetics thereof. This term includes oligonucleotides composed of naturally-occurring nucleobases, sugars and covalent internucleoside (backbone) linkages as well as oligonucleotides having non-naturally-occurring portions which function similarly. Such modified or substituted oligonucleotides are often preferred over native forms because of desirable properties such as, for example, enhanced cellular uptake, enhanced affinity for nucleic acid target and increased stability in the presence of nucleases. [0034]
  • While antisense oligonucleotides are a preferred form of antisense compound, the present invention comprehends other oligomeric antisense compounds, including but not limited to oligonucleotide mimetics such as are described below. The antisense compounds in accordance with this invention preferably comprise from about 8 to about 80 nucleobases (i.e. from about 8 to about 80 linked nucleosides). Particularly preferred antisense compounds are antisense oligonucleotides, even more preferably those comprising from about 12 to about 30 nucleobases. Antisense compounds include ribozymes, external guide sequence (EGS) oligonucleotides (oligozymes), and other short catalytic RNAs or catalytic oligonucleotides which hybridize to the target nucleic acid and modulate its expression. [0035]
  • As is known in the art, a nucleoside is a base-sugar combination. The base portion of the nucleoside is normally a heterocyclic base. The two most common classes of such heterocyclic bases are the purines and the pyrimidines. Nucleotides are nucleosides that further include a phosphate group covalently linked to the sugar portion of the nucleoside. For those nucleosides that include a pentofuranosyl sugar, the phosphate group can be linked to either the 2′, 3′ or 5′ hydroxyl moiety of the sugar. In forming oligonucleotides, the phosphate groups covalently link adjacent nucleosides to one another to form a linear polymeric compound. In turn the respective ends of this linear polymeric structure can be further joined to form a circular structure, however, open linear structures are generally preferred. In addition, linear structures may also have internal nucleobase complementarity and may therefore fold in a manner as to produce a double stranded structure. Within the oligonucleotide structure, the phosphate groups are commonly referred to as forming the internucleoside backbone of the oligonucleotide. The normal linkage or backbone of RNA and DNA is a 3′ to 5′ phosphodiester linkage. [0036]
  • Specific examples of preferred antisense compounds useful in this invention include oligonucleotides containing modified backbones or non-natural internucleoside linkages. As defined in this specification, oligonucleotides having modified backbones include those that retain a phosphorus atom in the backbone and those that do not have a phosphorus atom in the backbone. For the purposes of this specification, and as sometimes referenced in the art, modified oligonucleotides that do not have a phosphorus atom in their internucleoside backbone can also be considered to be oligonucleosides. [0037]
  • Preferred modified oligonucleotide backbones include, for example, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates, 5′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, selenophosphates and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein one or more internucleotide linkages is a 3′ to 3′, 5′ to 5′ or 2′ to 2′ linkage. Preferred oligonucleotides having inverted polarity comprise a single 3′ to 3′ linkage at the 3′-most internucleotide linkage i.e. a single inverted nucleoside residue which may be abasic (the nucleobase is missing or has a hydroxyl group in place thereof). Various salts, mixed salts and free acid forms are also included. [0038]
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of the above phosphorus-containing linkages include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,687,808; 4,469,863; 4,476,301; 5,023,243; 5,177,196; 5,188,897; 5,264,423; 5,276,019; 5,278,302; 5,286,717; 5,321,131; 5,399,676; 5,405,939; 5,453,496; 5,455,233; 5,466,677; 5,476,925; 5,519,126; 5,536,821; 5,541,306; 5,550,111; 5,563,253; 5,571,799; 5,587,361; 5,194,599; 5,565,555; 5,527,899; 5,721,218; 5,672,697 and 5,625,050, certain of which are commonly owned with this application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference. [0039]
  • Preferred modified oligonucleotide backbones that do not include a phosphorus atom therein have backbones that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages. These include those having morpholino linkages (formed in part from the sugar portion of a nucleoside); siloxane backbones; sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones; formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; riboacetyl backbones; alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S and CH[0040] 2 component parts.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of the above oligonucleosides include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,034,506; 5,166,315; 5,185,444; 5,214,134; 5,216,141; 5,235,033; 5,264,562; 5,264,564; 5,405,938; 5,434,257; 5,466,677; 5,470,967; 5,489,677; 5,541,307; 5,561,225; 5,596,086; 5,602,240; 5,610,289; 5,602,240; 5,608,046; 5,610,289; 5,618,704; 5,623,070; 5,663,312; 5,633,360; 5,677,437; 5,792,608; 5,646,269 and 5,677,439, certain of which are commonly owned with this application, and each of which Is herein incorporated by reference. [0041]
  • In other preferred oligonucleotide mimetics, both the sugar and the internucleoside linkage, i.e., the backbone, of the nucleotide units are replaced with novel groups. The base units are maintained for hybridization with an appropriate nucleic acid target compound. One such oligomeric compound, an oligonucleotide mimetic that has been shown to have excellent hybridization properties, is referred to as a peptide nucleic acid (PNA). In PNA compounds, the sugar-backbone of an oligonucleotide is replaced with an amide containing backbone, in particular an aminoethylglycine backbone. The nucleobases are retained and are bound directly or indirectly to aza nitrogen atoms of the amide portion of the backbone. Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of PNA compounds include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082; 5,714,331; and 5,719,262, each of which is herein incorporated by reference. Further teaching of PNA compounds can be found in Nielsen et al., [0042] Science, 1991, 254, 1497-1500.
  • Most preferred embodiments of the invention are oligonucleotides with phosphorothioate backbones and oligonucleosides with heteroatom backbones, and in particular —CH[0043] 2—NH—O—CH2—, —CH2—N(CH3)—O—CH2— [known as a methylene (methylimino) or MMI backbone], —CH2—O—N(CH3)—CH2—, —CH2—N(CH3)—N(CH3)—CH2— and —O—N(CH3)—CH2—CH2— [wherein the native phosphodiester backbone is represented as —O—P—O—CH2—] of the above referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,489,677, and the amide backbones of the above referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,602,240. Also preferred are oligonucleotides having morpholino backbone structures of the above-referenced U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,506.
  • Modified oligonucleotides may also contain one or more substituted sugar moieties. Preferred oligonucleotides comprise one of the following at the 2′ position: OH; F; O-, S-, or N-alkyl; O-, S-, or N-alkenyl; O-, S- or N-alkynyl; or O-alkyl-O-alkyl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl may be substituted or unsubstituted C[0044] 1 to C10 alkyl or C2 to C10 alkenyl and alkynyl. Particularly preferred are O[(CH2)nO] mCH3, O(CH2)nOCH3, O(CH2)nNH2, O(CH2)CH3, O(CH2)nONH2, and O(CH2)nON[(CH2)CH3)]2, where n and m are from 1 to about 10. Other preferred oligonucleotides comprise one of the following at the 2′ position: C1 to C1D lower alkyl, substituted lower alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkaryl, aralkyl, O-alkaryl or O-aralkyl, SH, SCH3, OCN, Cl, Br, CN, CF3, OCF3, SOCH3, SO2CH3, ONO2, NO2, N3, NH2, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkaryl, aminoalkylamino, polyalkylamino, substituted silyl, an RNA cleaving group, a reporter group, an intercalator, a group for improving the pharmacokinetic properties of an oligonucleotide, or a group for improving the pharmacodynamic properties of an oligonucleotide, and other substituents having similar properties. A preferred modification includes 2′-methoxyethoxy (2′-O—CH2CH2OCH3, also known as 2′-O—(2-methoxyethyl) or 2′-MOE) (Martin et al., Helv. Chim. Acta, 1995, 78, 486-504) i.e., an alkoxyalkoxy group. A further preferred modification includes 2′-dimethylaminooxyethoxy, i.e., a O(CH2)2ON(CH3)2 group, also known as 2′-DMAOE, as described in examples hereinbelow, and 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy (also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl or 2′-DMAEOE), i.e., 2′-O—CH2—O—CH2—N(CH2)2, also described in examples hereinbelow.
  • Other preferred modifications include 2′-methoxy (2′-O—CH[0045] 3), 2′-aminopropoxy (2′-OCH2CH2CH2NH2), 2′-allyl (2′-CH2—CH═CH2), 2′-O-allyl (2′-O—CH2—CH═CH2) and 2′-fluoro (2′-F). The 2′-modification may be in the arabino (up) position or ribo (down) position. A preferred 2′-arabino modification is 2′-F. Similar modifications may also be made at other positions on the oligonucleotide, particularly the 3′ position of the sugar on the 3′ terminal nucleotide or in 2′-5′ linked oligonucleotides and the 5′ position of 5′ terminal nucleotide. Oligonucleotides may also have sugar mimetics such as cyclobutyl moieties in place of the pentofuranosyl sugar. Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such modified sugar structures include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,981,957; 5,118,800; 5,319,080; 5,359,044; 5,393,878; 5,446,137; 5,466,786; 5,514,785; 5,519,134; 5,567,811; 5,576,427; 5,591,722; 5,597,909; 5,610,300; 5,627,053; 5,639,873; 5,646,265; 5,658,873; 5,670,633; 5,792,747; and 5,700,920, certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • A further prefered modification includes Locked Nucleic Acids (LNAs) in which the 2′-hydroxyl group is linked to the 3′ or 4′ carbon atom of the sugar ring thereby forming a bicyclic sugar moiety. The linkage is preferably a methelyne (—CH[0046] 2—)n group bridging the 2′ oxygen atom and the 4′ carbon atom wherein n is 1 or 2. LNAs and preparation thereof are described in WO 98/39352 and WO 99/14226.
  • Oligonucleotides may also include nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions. As used herein, “unmodified” or “natural” nucleobases include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), cytosine (C) and uracil (U). Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as 5-methylcytosine (5-me-C), 5-hydroxymethyl cytosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine and 2-thiocytosine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl (—C≡C—CH[0047] 3) uracil and cytosine and other alkynyl derivatives of pyrimidine bases, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-thioalkyl, 8-hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-halo particularly 5-bromo, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine and 7-methyladenine, 2-F-adenine, 2-amino-adenine, 8-azaguanine and 8-azaadenine, 7-deazaguanine and 7-deazaadenine and 3-deazaguanine and 3-deazaadenine. Further modified nucleobases include tricyclic pyrimidines such as phenoxazine cytidine(1H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzoxazin-2(3H)-one), phenothiazine cytidine (1H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzothiazin-2(3H)-one), G-clamps such as a substituted phenoxazine cytidine (e.g. 9-(2-aminoethoxy)-H-pyrimido[5,4-b] [1,4]benzoxazin-2(3H)-one), carbazole cytidine (2H-pyrimido[4,5-b]indol-2-one), pyridoindole cytidine (H-pyrido[3′,2′:4,5]pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-2-one). Modified nucleobases may also include those in which the purine or pyrimidine base is replaced with other heterocycles, for example 7-deaza-adenine, 7-deazaguanosine, 2-aminopyridine and 2-pyridone. Further nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, those disclosed in The Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science And Engineering, pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, J. I., ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990, those disclosed by Englisch et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613, and those disclosed by Sanghvi, Y. S., Chapter 15, Antisense Research and Applications, pages 289-302, Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B. ed., CRC Press, 1993. Certain of these nucleobases are particularly useful for increasing the binding affinity of the oligomeric compounds of the invention. These include 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine. 5-methylcytosine substitutions have been shown to increase nucleic acid duplex stability by 0.6-1.2° C. (Sanghvi, Y. S., Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., eds., Antisense Research and Applications, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1993, pp. 276-278) and are presently preferred base substitutions, even more particularly when combined with 2′-O-methoxyethyl sugar modifications.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of certain of the above noted modified nucleobases as well as other modified nucleobases include, but are not limited to, the above noted U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, as well as U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,845,205; 5,130,302; 5,134,066; 5,175,273; 5,367,066; 5,432,272; 5,457,187; 5,459,255; 5,484,908; 5,502,177; 5,525,711; 5,552,540; 5,587,469; 5,594,121, 5,596,091; 5,614,617; 5,645,985; 5,830,653; 5,763,588; 6,005,096; and 5,681,941, certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,750,692, which is commonly owned with the instant application and also herein incorporated by reference. [0048]
  • Another modification of the oligonucleotides of the invention involves chemically linking to the oligonucleotide one or more moieties or conjugates which enhance the activity, cellular distribution or cellular uptake of the oligonucleotide. The compounds of the invention can include conjugate groups covalently bound to functional groups such as primary or secondary hydroxyl groups. Conjugate groups of the invention include intercalators, reporter molecules, polyamines, polyamides, polyethylene glycols, polyethers, groups that enhance the pharmacodynamic properties of oligomers, and groups that enhance the pharmacokinetic properties of oligomers. Typical conjugates groups include cholesterols, lipids, phospholipids, biotin, phenazine, folate, phenanthridine, anthraquinone, acridine, fluoresceins, rhodamines, coumarins, and dyes. Groups that enhance the pharmacodynamic properties, in the context of this invention, include groups that improve oligomer uptake, enhance oligomer resistance to degradation, and/or strengthen sequence-specific hybridization with RNA. Groups that enhance the pharmacokinetic properties, in the context of this invention, include groups that improve oligomer uptake, distribution, metabolism or excretion. Representative conjugate groups are disclosed in International Patent Application PCT/US92/09196, filed Oct. 23, 1992 the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Conjugate moieties include but are not limited to lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety (Letsinger et al., [0049] Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1989, 86, 6553-6556), cholic acid (Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Let., 1994, 4, 1053-1060), a thioether, e.g., hexyl-S-tritylthiol (Manoharan et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci., 1992, 660, 306-309; Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Let., 1993, 3, 2765-2770), a thiocholesterol (Oberhauser et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 1992, 20, 533-538), an aliphatic chain, e.g., dodecandiol or undecyl residues (Saison-Behmoaras et al., EMBO J., 1991, 10, 1111-1118; Kabanov et al., FEBS Lett., 1990, 259, 327-330; Svinarchuk et al., Biochimie, 1993, 75, 49-54), a phospholipid, e.g., di-hexadecyl-rac-glycerol or triethylammonium 1,2-di-O-hexadecyl-rac-glycero-3-H-phosphonate (Manoharan et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1995, 36, 3651-3654; Shea et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 1990, 18, 3777-3783), a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain (Manoharan et al., Nucleosides & Nucleotides, 1995, 14, 969-973), or adamantane acetic acid (Manoharan et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1995, 36, 3651-3654), a palmityl moiety (Mishra et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 1995, 1264, 229-237), or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-oxycholesterol moiety (Crooke et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 1996, 277, 923-937. Oligonucleotides of the invention may also be conjugated to active drug substances, for example, aspirin, warfarin, phenylbutazone, ibuprofen, suprofen, fenbufen, ketoprofen, (S)-(+)-pranoprofen, carprofen, dansylsarcosine, 2,3,5-triiodobenzoic acid, flufenamic acid, folinic acid, a benzothiadiazide, chlorothiazide, a diazepine, indomethicin, a barbiturate, a cephalosporin, a sulfa drug, an antidiabetic, an antibacterial or an antibiotic. Oligonucleotide-drug conjugates and their preparation are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/334,130 (filed Jun. 15, 1999) which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such oligonucleotide conjugates include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,828,979; 4,948,882; 5,218,105; 5,525,465; 5,541,313; 5,545,730; 5,552,538; 5,578,717, 5,580,731; 5,580,731; 5,591,584; 5,109,124; 5,118,802; 5,138,045; 5,414,077; 5,486,603; 5,512,439; 5,578,718; 5,608,046; 4,587,044; 4,605,735; 4,667,025; 4,762,779; 4,789,737; 4,824,941; 4,835,263; 4,876,335; 4,904,582; 4,958,013; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,245,022; 5,254,469; 5,258,506; 5,262,536; 5,272,250; 5,292,873; 5,317,098; 5,371,241, 5,391,723; 5,416,203, 5,451,463; 5,510,475; 5,512,667; 5,514,785; 5,565,552; 5,567,810; 5,574,142; 5,585,481; 5,587,371; 5,595,726; 5,597,696; 5,599,923; 5,599,928 and 5,688,941, certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference. [0050]
  • It is not necessary for all positions in a given compound to be uniformly modified, and in fact more than one of the aforementioned modifications may be incorporated in a single compound or even at a single nucleoside within an oligonucleotide. The present invention also includes antisense compounds which are chimeric compounds. “Chimeric” antisense compounds or “chimeras,” in the context of this invention, are antisense compounds, particularly oligonucleotides, which contain two or more chemically distinct regions, each made up of at least one monomer unit, i.e., a nucleotide in the case of an oligonucleotide compound. These oligonucleotides typically contain at least one region wherein the oligonucleotide is modified so as to confer upon the oligonucleotide increased resistance to nuclease degradation, increased cellular uptake, increased stability and/or increased binding affinity for the target nucleic acid. An additional region of the oligonucleotide may serve as a substrate for enzymes capable of cleaving RNA:DNA or RNA:RNA hybrids. By way of example, RNase H is a cellular endonuclease which cleaves the RNA strand of an RNA:DNA duplex. Activation of RNase H, therefore, results in cleavage of the RNA target, thereby greatly enhancing the efficiency of oligonucleotide inhibition of gene expression. The cleavage of RNA:RNA hybrids can, in like fashion, be accomplished through the actions of endoribonucleases, such as interferon-induced RNAseL which cleaves both cellular and viral RNA. Consequently, comparable results can often be obtained with shorter oligonucleotides when chimeric oligonucleotides are used, compared to phosphorothioate deoxyoligonucleotides hybridizing to the same target region. Cleavage of the RNA target can be routinely detected by gel electrophoresis and, if necessary, associated nucleic acid hybridization techniques known in the art. [0051]
  • Chimeric antisense compounds of the invention may be formed as composite structures of two or more oligonucleotides, modified oligonucleotides, oligonucleosides and/or oligonucleotide mimetics as described above. Such compounds have also been referred to in the art as hybrids or gapmers. Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such hybrid structures include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,013,830; 5,149,797; 5,220,007; 5,256,775; 5,366,878; 5,403,711; 5,491,133; 5,565,350; 5,623,065; 5,652,355; 5,652,356; and 5,700,922, certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. [0052]
  • The antisense compounds used in accordance with this invention may be conveniently and routinely made through the well-known technique of solid phase synthesis. Equipment for such synthesis is sold by several vendors including, for example, Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.). Any other means for such synthesis known in the art may additionally or alternatively be employed. It is well known to use similar techniques to prepare oligonucleotides such as the phosphorothioates and alkylated derivatives. [0053]
  • The compounds of the invention may also be admixed, encapsulated, conjugated or otherwise associated with other molecules, molecule structures or mixtures of compounds, as for example, liposomes, receptor targeted molecules, oral, rectal, topical or other formulations, for assisting in uptake, distribution and/or absorption. Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such uptake, distribution and/or absorption assisting formulations include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,108,921; 5,354,844; 5,416,016; 5,459,127; 5,521,291; 5,543,158; 5,547,932; 5,583,020; 5,591,721; 4,426,330; 4,534,899; 5,013,556; 5,108,921; 5,213,804; 5,227,170; 5,264,221; 5,356,633; 5,395,619; 5,416,016; 5,417,978; 5,462,854; 5,469,854; 5,512,295; 5,527,528; 5,534,259; 5,543,152; 5,556,948; 5,580,575; and 5,595,756, each of which is herein incorporated by reference. [0054]
  • The antisense compounds of the invention encompass any pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters, or salts of such esters, or any other compound which, upon administration to an animal including a human, is capable of providing (directly or indirectly) the biologically active metabolite or residue thereof. Accordingly, for example, the disclosure is also drawn to prodrugs and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such prodrugs, and other bioequivalents. [0055]
  • The term “prodrug” indicates a therapeutic agent that is prepared in an inactive form that is converted to an active form (i.e., drug) within the body or cells thereof by the action of endogenous enzymes or other chemicals and/or conditions. In particular, prodrug versions of the oligonucleotides of the invention are prepared as SATE [(S-acetyl-2-thioethyl) phosphate] derivatives according to the methods disclosed in WO 93/24510 to Gosselin et al., published Dec. 9, 1993 or in WO 94/26764 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,713 to Imbach et al. [0056]
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to physiologically and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention: i.e., salts that retain the desired biological activity of the parent compound and do not impart undesired toxicological effects thereto. [0057]
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts are formed with metals or amines, such as alkali and alkaline earth metals or organic amines. Examples of metals used as cations are sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, and the like. Examples of suitable amines are N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, ethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, and procaine (see, for example, Berge et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts,” [0058] J. of Pharma Sci., 1977, 66, 1-19). The base addition salts of said acidic compounds are prepared by contacting the free acid form with a sufficient amount of the desired base to produce the salt in the conventional manner. The free acid form may be regenerated by contacting the salt form with an acid and isolating the free acid in the conventional manner. The free acid forms differ from their respective salt forms somewhat in certain physical properties such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to their respective free acid for purposes of the present invention. As used herein, a “pharmaceutical addition salt” includes a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of an acid form of one of the components of the compositions of the invention. These include organic or inorganic acid salts of the amines. Preferred acid salts are the hydrochlorides, acetates, salicylates, nitrates and phosphates. Other suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known to those skilled in the art and include basic salts of a variety of inorganic and organic acids, such as, for example, with inorganic acids, such as for example hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid or phosphoric acid; with organic carboxylic, sulfonic, sulfo or phospho acids or N-substituted sulfamic acids, for example acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, hydroxymaleic acid, methylmaleic acid, fumaric acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, lactic acid, oxalic acid, gluconic acid, glucaric acid, glucuronic acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, salicylic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, 2-phenoxybenzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, embonic acid, nicotinic acid or isonicotinic acid; and with amino acids, such as the 20 alpha-amino acids involved in the synthesis of proteins in nature, for example glutamic acid or aspartic acid, and also with phenylacetic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, ethane-1,2-disulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, naphthalene-1,5-disulfonic acid, 2- or 3-phosphoglycerate, glucose-6-phosphate, N-cyclohexylsulfamic acid (with the formation of cyclamates), or with other acid organic compounds, such as ascorbic acid. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds may also be prepared with a pharmaceutically acceptable cation. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable cations are well known to those skilled in the art and include alkaline, alkaline earth, ammonium and quaternary ammonium cations. Carbonates or hydrogen carbonates are also possible.
  • For oligonucleotides, preferred examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts include but are not limited to (a) salts formed with cations such as sodium, potassium, ammonium, magnesium, calcium, polyamines such as spermine and spermidine, etc.; (b) acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids, for example hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, nitric acid and the like; (c) salts formed with organic acids such as, for example, acetic acid, oxalic acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, citric acid, malic acid, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, tannic acid, palmitic acid, alginic acid, polyglutamic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenedisulfonic acid, polygalacturonic acid, and the like; and (d) salts formed from elemental anions such as chlorine, bromine, and iodine. [0059]
  • The antisense compounds of the present invention can be utilized for diagnostics, therapeutics, prophylaxis and as research reagents and kits. For therapeutics, an animal, preferably a human, suspected of having a disease or disorder which can be treated by modulating the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is treated by administering antisense compounds in accordance with this invention. The compounds of the invention can be utilized in pharmaceutical compositions by adding an effective amount of an antisense compound to a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier. Use of the antisense compounds and methods of the invention may also be useful prophylactically, e.g., to prevent or delay infection, inflammation or tumor formation, for example. [0060]
  • The antisense compounds of the invention are useful for research and diagnostics, because these compounds hybridize to nucleic acids encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, enabling sandwich and other assays to easily be constructed to exploit this fact. Hybridization of the antisense oligonucleotides of the invention with a nucleic acid encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 can be detected by means known in the art. Such means may include conjugation of an enzyme to the oligonucleotide, radiolabelling of the oligonucleotide or any other suitable detection means. Kits using such detection means for detecting the level of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 in a sample may also be prepared. [0061]
  • The present invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and formulations which include the antisense compounds of the invention. The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be administered in a number of ways depending upon whether local or systemic treatment is desired and upon the area to be treated. Administration may be topical (including ophthalmic and to mucous membranes including vaginal and rectal delivery), pulmonary, e.g., by inhalation or insufflation of powders or aerosols, including by nebulizer; intratracheal, intranasal, epidermal and transdermal), oral or parenteral. Parenteral administration includes intravenous, intraarterial, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal or intramuscular injection or infusion; or intracranial, e.g., intrathecal or intraventricular, administration. Oligonucleotides with at least one 2′-O-methoxyethyl modification are believed to be particularly useful for oral administration. [0062]
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and formulations for topical administration may include transdermal patches, ointments, lotions, creams, gels, drops, suppositories, sprays, liquids and powders. Conventional pharmaceutical carriers, aqueous, powder or oily bases, thickeners and the like may be necessary or desirable. Coated condoms, gloves and the like may also be useful. Preferred topical formulations include those in which the oligonucleotides of the invention are in admixture with a topical delivery agent such as lipids, liposomes, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, steroids, chelating agents and surfactants. Preferred lipids and liposomes include neutral (e.g. dioleoylphosphatidyl DOPE ethanolamine, dimyristoylphosphatidyl choline DMPC, distearolyphosphatidyl choline) negative (e.g. dimyristoylphosphatidyl glycerol DMPG) and cationic (e.g. dioleoyltetramethylaminopropyl DOTAP and dioleoylphosphatidyl ethanolamine DOTMA). Oligonucleotides of the invention may be encapsulated within liposomes or may form complexes thereto, in particular to cationic liposomes. Alternatively, oligonucleotides may be complexed to lipids, in particular to cationic lipids. Preferred fatty acids and esters include but are not limited arachidonic acid, oleic acid, eicosanoic acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein, dilaurin, glyceryl 1-monocaprate, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, an acylcarnitine, an acylcholine, or a C[0063] 1-10 alkyl ester (e.g. isopropylmyristate IPM), monoglyceride, diglyceride or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. Topical formulations are described in detail in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/315,298 filed on May 20, 1999 which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Compositions and formulations for oral administration include powders or granules, microparticulates, nanoparticulates, suspensions or solutions in water or non-aqueous media, capsules, gel capsules, sachets, tablets or minitablets. Thickeners, flavoring agents, diluents, emulsifiers, dispersing aids or binders may be desirable. Preferred oral formulations are those in which oligonucleotides of the invention are administered in conjunction with one or more penetration enhancers surfactants and chelators. Preferred surfactants include fatty acids and/or esters or salts thereof, bile acids and/or salts thereof. Prefered bile acids/salts include chenodeoxycholic acid (CDCA) and ursodeoxychenodeoxycholic acid (UDCA), cholic acid, dehydrocholic acid, deoxycholic acid, glucholic acid, glycholic acid, glycodeoxycholic acid, taurocholic acid, taurodeoxycholic acid, sodium tauro-24,25-dihydro-fusidate, sodium glycodihydrofusidate. Prefered fatty acids include arachidonic acid, undecanoic acid, oleic acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein, dilaurin, glyceryl 1-monocaprate, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, an acylcarnitine, an acylcholine, or a monoglyceride, a diglyceride or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof (e.g. sodium). Also prefered are combinations of penetration enhancers, for example, fatty acids/salts in combination with bile acids/salts. A particularly prefered combination is the sodium salt of lauric acid, capric acid and UDCA. Further penetration enhancers include polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene-20-cetyl ether. Oligonucleotides of the invention may be delivered orally in granular form including sprayed dried particles, or complexed to form micro or nanoparticles. Oligonucleotide complexing agents include poly-amino acids; polyimines; polyacrylates; polyalkylacrylates, polyoxethanes, polyalkylcyanoacrylates; cationized gelatins, albumins, starches, acrylates, polyethyleneglycols (PEG) and starches; polyalkylcyanoacrylates; DEAE-derivatized polyimines, pollulans, celluloses and starches. Particularly preferred complexing agents include chitosan, N-trimethylchitosan, poly-L-lysine, polyhistidine, polyornithine, polyspermines, protamine, polyvinylpyridine, polythiodiethylaminomethylethylene P(TDAE), polyaminostyrene (e.g. p-amino), poly(methylcyanoacrylate), poly(ethylcyanoacrylate), poly(butylcyanoacrylate), poly(isobutylcyanoacrylate), poly(isohexylcynaoacrylate), DEAE-methacrylate, DEAE-hexylacrylate, DEAE-acrylamide, DEAE-albumin and DEAE-dextran, polymethylacrylate, polyhexylacrylate, poly(D,L-lactic acid), poly(DL-lactic-co-glycolic acid (PLGA), alginate, and polyethyleneglycol (PEG). Oral formulations for oligonucleotides and their preparation are described in detail in U.S. application Ser. No. 08/886,829 (filed Jul. 1, 1997), Ser. No. 09/108,673 (filed Jul. 1, 1998), Ser. No. 09/256,515 (filed Feb. 23, 1999), Ser. No. 09/082,624 (filed May 21, 1998) and Ser. No. 09/315,298 (filed May 20, 1999) each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. [0064]
  • Compositions and formulations for parenteral, intrathecal or intraventricular administration may include sterile aqueous solutions which may also contain buffers, diluents and other suitable additives such as, but not limited to, penetration enhancers, carrier compounds and other pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients. [0065]
  • Pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention include, but are not limited to, solutions, emulsions, and liposome-containing formulations. These compositions may be generated from a variety of components that include, but are not limited to, preformed liquids, self-emulsifying solids and self-emulsifying semisolids. [0066]
  • The pharmaceutical formulations of the present invention, which may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form, may be prepared according to conventional techniques well known in the pharmaceutical industry. Such techniques include the step of bringing into association the active ingredients with the pharmaceutical carrier(s) or excipient(s). In general the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredients with liquid carriers or finely divided solid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product. [0067]
  • The compositions of the present invention may be formulated into any of many possible dosage forms such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gel capsules, liquid syrups, soft gels, suppositories, and enemas. The compositions of the present invention may also be formulated as suspensions in aqueous, non-aqueous or mixed media. Aqueous suspensions may further contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension including, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, sorbitol and/or dextran. The suspension may also contain stabilizers. [0068]
  • In one embodiment of the present invention the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated and used as foams. Pharmaceutical foams include formulations such as, but not limited to, emulsions, microemulsions, creams, jellies and liposomes. While basically similar in nature these formulations vary in the components and the consistency of the final product. The preparation of such compositions and formulations is generally known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical and formulation arts and may be applied to the formulation of the compositions of the present invention. [0069]
  • Emulsions [0070]
  • The compositions of the present invention may be prepared and formulated as emulsions. Emulsions are typically heterogenous systems of one liquid dispersed in another in the form of droplets usually exceeding 0.1 μm in diameter. (Idson, in [0071] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199; Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., Volume 1, p. 245; Block in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 2, p. 335; Higuchi et al., in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 301). Emulsions are often biphasic systems comprising of two immiscible liquid phases intimately mixed and dispersed with each other. In general, emulsions may be either water-in-oil (w/o) or of the oil-in-water (o/w) variety. When an aqueous phase is finely divided into and dispersed as minute droplets into a bulk oily phase the resulting composition is called a water-in-oil (w/o) emulsion. Alternatively, when an oily phase is finely divided into and dispersed as minute droplets into a bulk aqueous phase the resulting composition is called an oil-in-water (o/w) emulsion. Emulsions may contain additional components in addition to the dispersed phases and the active drug which may be present as a solution in either the aqueous phase, oily phase or itself as a separate phase. Pharmaceutical excipients such as emulsifiers, stabilizers, dyes, and anti-oxidants may also be present in emulsions as needed. Pharmaceutical emulsions may also be multiple emulsions that are comprised of more than two phases such as, for example, in the case of oil-in-water-in-oil (o/w/o) and water-in-oil-in-water (w/o/w) emulsions. Such complex formulations often provide certain advantages that simple binary emulsions do not. Multiple emulsions in which individual oil droplets of an o/w emulsion enclose small water droplets constitute a w/o/w emulsion. Likewise a system of oil droplets enclosed in globules of water stabilized in an oily continuous provides an o/w/o emulsion.
  • Emulsions are characterized by little or no thermodynamic stability. Often, the dispersed or discontinuous phase of the emulsion is well dispersed into the external or continuous phase and maintained in this form through the means of emulsifiers or the viscosity of the formulation. Either of the phases of the emulsion may be a semisolid or a solid, as is the case of emulsion-style ointment bases and creams. Other means of stabilizing emulsions entail the use of emulsifiers that may be incorporated into either phase of the emulsion. Emulsifiers may broadly be classified into four categories: synthetic surfactants, naturally occurring emulsifiers, absorption bases, and finely dispersed solids (Idson, in [0072] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
  • Synthetic surfactants, also known as surface active agents, have found wide applicability in the formulation of emulsions and have been reviewed in the literature (Rieger, in [0073] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, volume 1, p. 199). Surfactants are typically amphiphilic and comprise a hydrophilic and a hydrophobic portion. The ratio of the hydrophilic to the hydrophobic nature of the surfactant has been termed the hydrophile/lipophile balance (HLB) and is a valuable tool in categorizing and selecting surfactants in the preparation of formulations. Surfactants may be classified into different classes based on the nature of the hydrophilic group: nonionic, anionic, cationic and amphoteric (Rieger, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 285).
  • Naturally occurring emulsifiers used in emulsion formulations include lanolin, beeswax, phosphatides, lecithin and acacia. Absorption bases possess hydrophilic properties such that they can soak up water to form w/o emulsions yet retain their semisolid consistencies, such as anhydrous lanolin and hydrophilic petrolatum. Finely divided solids have also been used as good emulsifiers especially in combination with surfactants and in viscous preparations. These include polar inorganic solids, such as heavy metal hydroxides, nonswelling clays such as bentonite, attapulgite, hectorite, kaolin, montmorillonite, colloidal aluminum silicate and colloidal magnesium aluminum silicate, pigments and nonpolar solids such as carbon or glyceryl tristearate. [0074]
  • A large variety of non-emulsifying materials are also included in emulsion formulations and contribute to the properties of emulsions. These include fats, oils, waxes, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, fatty esters, humectants, hydrophilic colloids, preservatives and antioxidants (Block, in [0075] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 335; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199).
  • Hydrophilic colloids or hydrocolloids include naturally occurring gums and synthetic polymers such as polysaccharides (for example, acacia, agar, alginic acid, carrageenan, guar gum, karaya gum, and tragacanth), cellulose derivatives (for example, carboxymethylcellulose and carboxypropylcellulose), and synthetic polymers (for example, carbomers, cellulose ethers, and carboxyvinyl polymers). These disperse or swell in water to form colloidal solutions that stabilize emulsions by forming strong interfacial films around the dispersed-phase droplets and by increasing the viscosity of the external phase. [0076]
  • Since emulsions often contain a number of ingredients such as carbohydrates, proteins, sterols and phosphatides that may readily support the growth of microbes, these formulations often incorporate preservatives. Commonly used preservatives included in emulsion formulations include methyl paraben, propyl paraben, quaternary ammonium salts, benzalkonium chloride, esters of p-hydroxybenzoic acid, and boric acid. Antioxidants are also commonly added to emulsion formulations to prevent deterioration of the formulation. Antioxidants used may be free radical scavengers such as tocopherols, alkyl gallates, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, or reducing agents such as ascorbic acid and sodium metabisulfite, and antioxidant synergists such as citric acid, tartaric acid, and lecithin. [0077]
  • The application of emulsion formulations via dermatological, oral and parenteral routes and methods for their manufacture have been reviewed in the literature (Idson, in [0078] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199). Emulsion formulations for oral delivery have been very widely used because of reasons of ease of formulation, efficacy from an absorption and bioavailability standpoint. (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245; Idson, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 199). Mineral-oil base laxatives, oil-soluble vitamins and high fat nutritive preparations are among the materials that have commonly been administered orally as o/w emulsions.
  • In one embodiment of the present invention, the compositions of oligonucleotides and nucleic acids are formulated as microemulsions. A microemulsion may be defined as a system of water, oil and amphiphile which is a single optically isotropic and thermodynamically stable liquid solution (Rosoff, in [0079] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245). Typically microemulsions are systems that are prepared by first dispersing an oil in an aqueous surfactant solution and then adding a sufficient amount of a fourth component, generally an intermediate chain-length alcohol to form a transparent system. Therefore, microemulsions have also been described as thermodynamically stable, isotropically clear dispersions of two immiscible liquids that are stabilized by interfacial films of surface-active molecules (Leung and Shah, in: Controlled Release of Drugs: Polymers and Aggregate Systems, Rosoff, M., Ed., 1989, VCH Publishers, New York, pages 185-215). Microemulsions commonly are prepared via a combination of three to five components that include oil, water, surfactant, cosurfactant and electrolyte. Whether the microemulsion is of the water-in-oil (w/o) or an oil-in-water (o/w) type is dependent on the properties of the oil and surfactant used and on the structure and geometric packing of the polar heads and hydrocarbon tails of the surfactant molecules (Schott, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1985, p. 271).
  • The phenomenological approach utilizing phase diagrams has been extensively studied and has yielded a comprehensive knowledge, to one skilled in the art, of how to formulate microemulsions (Rosoff, in Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245; Block, in [0080] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 335). Compared to conventional emulsions, microemulsions offer the advantage of solubilizing water-insoluble drugs in a formulation of thermodynamically stable droplets that are formed spontaneously.
  • Surfactants used in the preparation of microemulsions include, but are not limited to, ionic surfactants, non-ionic surfactants, Brij 96, polyoxyethylene oleyl ethers, polyglycerol fatty acid esters, tetraglycerol monolaurate (ML310), tetraglycerol monooleate (MO310), hexaglycerol monooleate (PO310), hexaglycerol pentaoleate (Po500), decaglycerol monocaprate (MCA750), decaglycerol monooleate (MO750), decaglycerol sequioleate (SO750), decaglycerol decaoleate (DAO750), alone or in combination with cosurfactants. The cosurfactant, usually a short-chain alcohol such as ethanol, 1-propanol, and 1-butanol, serves to increase the interfacial fluidity by penetrating into the surfactant film and consequently creating a disordered film because of the void space generated among surfactant molecules. Microemulsions may, however, be prepared without the use of cosurfactants and alcohol-free self-emulsifying microemulsion systems are known in the art. The aqueous phase may typically be, but is not limited to, water, an aqueous solution of the drug, glycerol, PEG300, PEG400, polyglycerols, propylene glycols, and derivatives of ethylene glycol. The oil phase may include, but is not limited to, materials such as Captex 300, Captex 355, Capmul MCM, fatty acid esters, medium chain (C8-C12) mono, di, and tri-glycerides, polyoxyethylated glyceryl fatty acid esters, fatty alcohols, polyglycolized glycerides, saturated polyglycolized C8-C10 glycerides, vegetable oils and silicone oil. [0081]
  • Microemulsions are particularly of interest from the standpoint of drug solubilization and the enhanced absorption of drugs. Lipid based microemulsions (both o/w and w/o) have been proposed to enhance the oral bioavailability of drugs, including peptides (Constantinides et al., [0082] Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385-1390; Ritschel, Meth. Find. Exp. Clin. Pharmacol., 1993, 13, 205). Microemulsions afford advantages of improved drug solubilization, protection of drug from enzymatic hydrolysis, possible enhancement of drug absorption due to surfactant-induced alterations in membrane fluidity and permeability, ease of preparation, ease of oral administration over solid dosage forms, improved clinical potency, and decreased toxicity (Constantinides et al., Pharmaceutical Research, 1994, 11, 1385; Ho et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1996, 85, 138-143). Often microemulsions may form spontaneously when their components are brought together at ambient temperature. This may be particularly advantageous when formulating thermolabile drugs, peptides or oligonucleotides. Microemulsions have also been effective in the transdermal delivery of active components in both cosmetic and pharmaceutical applications. It is expected that the microemulsion compositions and formulations of the present invention will facilitate the increased systemic absorption of oligonucleotides and nucleic acids from the gastrointestinal tract, as well as improve the local cellular uptake of oligonucleotides and nucleic acids within the gastrointestinal tract, vagina, buccal cavity and other areas of administration.
  • Microemulsions of the present invention may also contain additional components and additives such as sorbitan monostearate (Grill 3), Labrasol, and penetration enhancers to improve the properties of the formulation and to enhance the absorption of the oligonucleotides and nucleic acids of the present invention. Penetration enhancers used in the microemulsions of the present invention may be classified as belonging to one of five broad categories—surfactants, fatty acids, bile salts, chelating agents, and non-chelating non-surfactants (Lee et al., [0083] Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p. 92). Each of these classes has been discussed above.
  • Liposomes [0084]
  • There are many organized surfactant structures besides microemulsions that have been studied and used for the formulation of drugs. These include monolayers, micelles, bilayers and vesicles. Vesicles, such as liposomes, have attracted great interest because of their specificity and the duration of action they offer from the standpoint of drug delivery. As used in the present invention, the term “liposome” means a vesicle composed of amphiphilic lipids arranged in a spherical bilayer or bilayers. [0085]
  • Liposomes are unilamellar or multilamellar vesicles which have a membrane formed from a lipophilic material and an aqueous interior. The aqueous portion contains the composition to be delivered. Cationic liposomes possess the advantage of being able to fuse to the cell wall. Non-cationic liposomes, although not able to fuse as efficiently with the cell wall, are taken up by macrophages in vivo. [0086]
  • In order to cross intact mammalian skin, lipid vesicles must pass through a series of fine pores, each with a diameter less than 50 nm, under the influence of a suitable transdermal gradient. Therefore, it is desirable to use a liposome which is highly deformable and able to pass through such fine pores. [0087]
  • Further advantages of liposomes include; liposomes obtained from natural phospholipids are biocompatible and biodegradable; liposomes can incorporate a wide range of water and lipid soluble drugs; liposomes can protect encapsulated drugs in their internal compartments from metabolism and degradation (Rosoff, in [0088] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Lieberman, Rieger and Banker (Eds.), 1988, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., volume 1, p. 245). Important considerations in the preparation of liposome formulations are the lipid surface charge, vesicle size and the aqueous volume of the liposomes.
  • Liposomes are useful for the transfer and delivery of active ingredients to the site of action. Because the liposomal membrane is structurally similar to biological membranes, when liposomes are applied to a tissue, the liposomes start to merge with the cellular membranes. As the merging of the liposome and cell progresses, the liposomal contents are emptied into the cell where the active agent may act. [0089]
  • Liposomal formulations have been the focus of extensive investigation as the mode of delivery for many drugs. There is growing evidence that for topical administration, liposomes present several advantages over other formulations. Such advantages include reduced side-effects related to high systemic absorption of the administered drug, increased accumulation of the administered drug at the desired target, and the ability to administer a wide variety of drugs, both hydrophilic and hydrophobic, into the skin. [0090]
  • Several reports have detailed the ability of liposomes to deliver agents including high-molecular weight DNA into the skin. Compounds including analgesics, antibodies, hormones and high-molecular weight DNAs have been administered to the skin. The majority of applications resulted in the targeting of the upper epidermis. [0091]
  • Liposomes fall into two broad classes. Cationic liposomes are positively charged liposomes which interact with the negatively charged DNA molecules to form a stable complex. The positively charged DNA/liposome complex binds to the negatively charged cell surface and is internalized in an endosome. Due to the acidic pH within the endosome, the liposomes are ruptured, releasing their contents into the cell cytoplasm (Wang et al., [0092] Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun., 1987, 147, 980-985).
  • Liposomes which are pH-sensitive or negatively-charged, entrap DNA rather than complex with it. Since both the DNA and the lipid are similarly charged, repulsion rather than complex formation occurs. Nevertheless, some DNA is entrapped within the aqueous interior of these liposomes. pH-sensitive liposomes have been used to deliver DNA encoding the thymidine kinase gene to cell monolayers in culture. Expression of the exogenous gene was detected in the target cells (Zhou et al., [0093] Journal of Controlled Release, 1992, 19, 269-274).
  • One major type of liposomal composition includes phospholipids other than naturally-derived phosphatidylcholine. Neutral liposome compositions, for example, can be formed from dimyristoyl phosphatidylcholine (DMPC) or dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC). Anionic liposome compositions generally are formed from dimyristoyl phosphatidylglycerol, while anionic fusogenic liposomes are formed primarily from dioleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE). Another type of liposomal composition is formed from phosphatidylcholine (PC) such as, for example, soybean PC, and egg PC. Another type is formed from mixtures of phospholipid and/or phosphatidylcholine and/or cholesterol. [0094]
  • Several studies have assessed the topical delivery of liposomal drug formulations to the skin. Application of liposomes containing interferon to guinea pig skin resulted in a reduction of skin herpes sores while delivery of interferon via other means (e.g. as a solution or as an emulsion) were ineffective (Weiner et al., [0095] Journal of Drug Targeting, 1992, 2, 405-410). Further, an additional study tested the efficacy of interferon administered as part of a liposomal formulation to the administration of interferon using an aqueous system, and concluded that the liposomal formulation was superior to aqueous administration (du Plessis et al., Antiviral Research, 1992, 18, 259-265).
  • Non-ionic liposomal systems have also been examined to determine their utility in the delivery of drugs to the skin, in particular systems comprising non-ionic surfactant and cholesterol. Non-ionic liposomal formulations comprising Novasome™ I (glyceryl dilaurate/cholesterol/polyoxyethylene-10-stearyl ether) and Novasome™ II (glyceryl distearate/cholesterol/polyoxyethylene-10-stearyl ether) were used to deliver cyclosporin-A into the dermis of mouse skin. Results indicated that such non-ionic liposomal systems were effective in facilitating the deposition of cyclosporin-A into different layers of the skin (Hu et al. [0096] S.T.P.Pharma. Sci., 1994, 4, 6, 466).
  • Liposomes also include “sterically stabilized” liposomes, a term which, as used herein, refers to liposomes comprising one or more specialized lipids that, when incorporated into liposomes, result in enhanced circulation lifetimes relative to liposomes lacking such specialized lipids. Examples of sterically stabilized liposomes are those in which part of the vesicle-forming lipid portion of the liposome (A) comprises one or more glycolipids, such as monosialoganglioside G[0097] M1, or (B) is derivatized with one or more hydrophilic polymers, such as a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is thought in the art that, at least for sterically stabilized liposomes containing gangliosides, sphingomyelin, or PEG-derivatized lipids, the enhanced circulation half-life of these sterically stabilized liposomes derives from a reduced uptake into cells of the reticuloendothelial system (RES) (Allen et al., FEBS Letters, 1987, 223, 42; Wu et al., Cancer Research, 1993, 53, 3765).
  • Various liposomes comprising one or more glycolipids are known in the art. Papahadjopoulos et al. ([0098] Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci., 1987, 507, 64) reported the ability of monosialoganglioside GM1, galactocerebroside sulfate and phosphatidylinositol to improve blood half-lives of liposomes. These findings were expounded upon by Gabizon et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 1988, 85, 6949). U.S. Pat. No. 4,837,028 and WO 88/04924, both to Allen et al., disclose liposomes comprising (1) sphingomyelin and (2) the ganglioside GM1 or a galactocerebroside sulfate ester. U.S. Pat. No. 5,543,152 (Webb et al.) discloses liposomes comprising sphingomyelin. Liposomes comprising 1,2-sn-dimyristoylphosphatidylcholine are disclosed in WO 97/13499 (Lim et al.).
  • Many liposomes comprising lipids derivatized with one or more hydrophilic polymers, and methods of preparation thereof, are known in the art. Sunamoto et al. ([0099] Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 1980, 53, 2778) described liposomes comprising a nonionic detergent, 2C1215G, that contains a PEG moiety. Illum et al. (FEBS Lett., 1984, 167, 79) noted that hydrophilic coating of polystyrene particles with polymeric glycols results in significantly enhanced blood half-lives. Synthetic phospholipids modified by the attachment of carboxylic groups of polyalkylene glycols (e.g., PEG) are described by Sears (U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,426,330 and 4,534,899). Klibanov et al. (FEBS Lett., 1990, 268, 235) described experiments demonstrating that liposomes comprising phosphatidylethanolamine (PE) derivatized with PEG or PEG stearate have significant increases in blood circulation half-lives. Blume et al. (Biochimica et Biophysica Acta, 1990, 1029, 91) extended such observations to other PEG-derivatized phospholipids, e.g., DSPE-PEG, formed from the combination of distearoylphosphatidylethanolamine (DSPE) and PEG. Liposomes having covalently bound PEG moieties on their external surface are described in European Patent No. EP 0 445 131 B1 and WO 90/04384 to Fisher. Liposome compositions containing 1-20 mole percent of PE derivatized with PEG, and methods of use thereof, are described by Woodle et al. (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,013,556 and 5,356,633) and Martin et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 5,213,804 and European Patent No. EP 0 496 813 B1). Liposomes comprising a number of other lipid-polymer conjugates are disclosed in WO 91/05545 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,225,212 (both to Martin et al.) and in WO 94/20073 (Zalipsky et al.) Liposomes comprising PEG-modified ceramide lipids are described in WO 96/10391 (Choi et al.). U.S. Pat. No. 5,540,935 (Miyazaki et al.) and U.S. Pat. No. 5,556,948 (Tagawa et al.) describe PEG-containing liposomes that can be further derivatized with functional moieties on their surfaces.
  • A limited number of liposomes comprising nucleic acids are known in the art. WO 96/40062 to Thierry et al. discloses methods for encapsulating high molecular weight nucleic acids in liposomes. U.S. Pat. No. 5,264,221 to Tagawa et al. discloses protein-bonded liposomes and asserts that the contents of such liposomes may include an antisense RNA. U.S. Pat. No. 5,665,710 to Rahman et al. describes certain methods of encapsulating oligodeoxynucleotides in liposomes. WO 97/04787 to Love et al. discloses liposomes comprising antisense oligonucleotides targeted to the raf gene. [0100]
  • Transfersomes are yet another type of liposomes, and are highly deformable lipid aggregates which are attractive candidates for drug delivery vehicles. Transfersomes may be described as lipid droplets which are so highly deformable that they are easily able to penetrate through pores which are smaller than the droplet. Transfersomes are adaptable to the environment in which they are used, e.g. they are self-optimizing (adaptive to the shape of pores in the skin), self-repairing, frequently reach their targets without fragmenting, and often self-loading. To make transfersomes it is possible to add surface edge-activators, usually surfactants, to a standard liposomal composition. Transfersomes have been used to deliver serum albumin to the skin. The transfersome-mediated delivery of serum albumin has been shown to be as effective as subcutaneous injection of a solution containing serum albumin. [0101]
  • Surfactants find wide application in formulations such as emulsions (including microemulsions) and liposomes. The most common way of classifying and ranking the properties of the many different types of surfactants, both natural and synthetic, is by the use of the hydrophile/lipophile balance (HLB). The nature of the hydrophilic group (also known as the “head”) provides the most useful means for categorizing the different surfactants used in formulations (Rieger, in [0102] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, p. 285).
  • If the surfactant molecule is not ionized, it is classified as a nonionic surfactant. Nonionic surfactants find wide application in pharmaceutical and cosmetic products and are usable over a wide range of pH values. In general their HLB values range from 2 to about 18 depending on their structure. Nonionic surfactants include nonionic esters such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters, polyglyceryl esters, sorbitan esters, sucrose esters, and ethoxylated esters. Nonionic alkanolamides and ethers such as fatty alcohol ethoxylates, propoxylated alcohols, and ethoxylated/propoxylated block polymers are also included in this class. The polyoxyethylene surfactants are the most popular members of the nonionic surfactant class. [0103]
  • If the surfactant molecule carries a negative charge when it is dissolved or dispersed in water, the surfactant is classified as anionic. Anionic surfactants include carboxylates such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates. The most important members of the anionic surfactant class are the alkyl sulfates and the soaps. [0104]
  • If the surfactant molecule carries a positive charge when it is dissolved or dispersed in water, the surfactant is classified as cationic. Cationic surfactants include quaternary ammonium salts and ethoxylated amines. The quaternary ammonium salts are the most used members of this class. [0105]
  • If the surfactant molecule has the ability to carry either a positive or negative charge, the surfactant is classified as amphoteric. Amphoteric surfactants include acrylic acid derivatives, substituted alkylamides, N-alkylbetaines and phosphatides. [0106]
  • The use of surfactants in drug products, formulations and in emulsions has been reviewed (Rieger, in [0107] Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y., 1988, p. 285).
  • Penetration Enhancers [0108]
  • In one embodiment, the present invention employs various penetration enhancers to effect the efficient delivery of nucleic acids, particularly oligonucleotides, to the skin of animals. Most drugs are present in solution in both ionized and nonionized forms. However, usually only lipid soluble or lipophilic drugs readily cross cell membranes. It has been discovered that even non-lipophilic drugs may cross cell membranes if the membrane to be crossed is treated with a penetration enhancer. In addition to aiding the diffusion of non-lipophilic drugs across cell membranes, penetration enhancers also enhance the permeability of lipophilic drugs. [0109]
  • Penetration enhancers may be classified as belonging to one of five broad categories, i.e., surfactants, fatty acids, bile salts, chelating agents, and non-chelating non-surfactants (Lee et al., [0110] Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p.92). Each of the above mentioned classes of penetration enhancers are described below in greater detail.
  • Surfactants: In connection with the present invention, surfactants (or “surface-active agents”) are chemical entities which, when dissolved in an aqueous solution, reduce the surface tension of the solution or the interfacial tension between the aqueous solution and another liquid, with the result that absorption of oligonucleotides through the mucosa is enhanced. In addition to bile salts and fatty acids, these penetration enhancers include, for example, sodium lauryl sulfate, polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether and polyoxyethylene-20-cetyl ether) (Lee et al., [0111] Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p.92); and perfluorochemical emulsions, such as FC-43. Takahashi et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1988, 40, 252).
  • Fatty acids: Various fatty acids and their derivatives which act as penetration enhancers include, for example, oleic acid, lauric acid, capric acid (n-decanoic acid), myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, dicaprate, tricaprate, monoolein (1-monooleoyl-rac-glycerol), dilaurin, caprylic acid, arachidonic acid, glycerol 1-monocaprate, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, acylcarnitines, acylcholines, C[0112] 1-10 alkyl esters thereof (e.g., methyl, isopropyl and t-butyl), and mono- and di-glycerides thereof (i.e., oleate, laurate, caprate, myristate, palmitate, stearate, linoleate, etc.) (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, p.92; Muranishi, Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1990, 7, 1-33; El Hariri et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1992, 44, 651-654).
  • Bile salts: The physiological role of bile includes the facilitation of dispersion and absorption of lipids and fat-soluble vitamins (Brunton, Chapter 38 in: Goodman & Gilman's [0113] The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th Ed., Hardman et al. Eds., McGraw-Hill, New York, 1996, pp. 934-935). Various natural bile salts, and their synthetic derivatives, act as penetration enhancers. Thus the term “bile salts” includes any of the naturally occurring components of bile as well as any of their synthetic derivatives. The bile salts of the invention include, for example, cholic acid (or its pharmaceutically acceptable sodium salt, sodium cholate), dehydrocholic acid (sodium dehydrocholate), deoxycholic acid (sodium deoxycholate), glucholic acid (sodium glucholate), glycholic acid (sodium glycocholate), glycodeoxycholic acid (sodium glycodeoxycholate), taurocholic acid (sodium taurocholate), taurodeoxycholic acid (sodium taurodeoxycholate), chenodeoxycholic acid (sodium chenodeoxycholate), ursodeoxycholic acid (UDCA), sodium tauro-24,25-dihydro-fusidate (STDHF), sodium glycodihydrofusidate and polyoxyethylene-9-lauryl ether (POE) (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, page 92; Swinyard, Chapter 39 In: Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Ed., Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1990, pages 782-783; Muranishi, Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1990, 7, 1-33; Yamamoto et al., J. Pharm. Exp. Ther., 1992, 263, 25; Yamashita et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1990, 79, 579-583).
  • Chelating Agents: Chelating agents, as used in connection with the present invention, can be defined as compounds that remove metallic ions from solution by forming complexes therewith, with the result that absorption of oligonucleotides through the mucosa is enhanced. With regards to their use as penetration enhancers in the present invention, chelating agents have the added advantage of also serving as DNase inhibitors, as most characterized DNA nucleases require a divalent metal ion for catalysis and are thus inhibited by chelating agents (Jarrett, [0114] J. Chromatogr., 1993, 618, 315-339). Chelating agents of the invention include but are not limited to disodium ethylenediaminetetraacetate (EDTA), citric acid, salicylates (e.g., sodium salicylate, 5-methoxysalicylate and homovanilate), N-acyl derivatives of collagen, laureth-9 and N-amino acyl derivatives of beta-diketones (enamines)(Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, page 92; Muranishi, Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1990, 7, 1-33; Buur et al., J. Control Rel., 1990, 14, 43-51).
  • Non-chelating non-surfactants: As used herein, non-chelating non-surfactant penetration enhancing compounds can be defined as compounds that demonstrate insignificant activity as chelating agents or as surfactants but that nonetheless enhance absorption of oligonucleotides through the alimentary mucosa (Muranishi, [0115] Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1990, 7, 1-33). This class of penetration enhancers include, for example, unsaturated cyclic ureas, 1-alkyl- and 1-alkenylazacyclo-alkanone derivatives (Lee et al., Critical Reviews in Therapeutic Drug Carrier Systems, 1991, page 92); and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents such as diclofenac sodium, indomethacin and phenylbutazone (Yamashita et al., J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1987, 39, 621-626).
  • Agents that enhance uptake of oligonucleotides at the cellular level may also be added to the pharmaceutical and other compositions of the present invention. For example, cationic lipids, such as lipofectin (Junichi et al, U.S. Pat. No. 5,705,188), cationic glycerol derivatives, and polycationic molecules, such as polylysine (Lollo et al., PCT Application WO 97/30731), are also known to enhance the cellular uptake of oligonucleotides. [0116]
  • Other agents may be utilized to enhance the penetration of the administered nucleic acids, including glycols such as ethylene glycol and propylene glycol, pyrrols such as 2-pyrrol, azones, and terpenes such as limonene and menthone. [0117]
  • Carriers [0118]
  • Certain compositions of the present invention also incorporate carrier compounds in the formulation. As used herein, “carrier compound” or “carrier” can refer to a nucleic acid, or analog thereof, which is inert (i.e., does not possess biological activity per se) but is recognized as a nucleic acid by in vivo processes that reduce the bioavailability of a nucleic acid having biological activity by, for example, degrading the biologically active nucleic acid or promoting its removal from circulation. The coadministration of a nucleic acid and a carrier compound, typically with an excess of the latter substance, can result in a substantial reduction of the amount of nucleic acid recovered in the liver, kidney or other extracirculatory reservoirs, presumably due to competition between the carrier compound and the nucleic acid for a common receptor. For example, the recovery of a partially phosphorothioate oligonucleotide in hepatic tissue can be reduced when it is coadministered with polyinosinic acid, dextran sulfate, polycytidic acid or 4-acetamido-4′isothiocyano-stilbene-2,2′-disulfonic acid (Miyao et al., [0119] Antisense Res. Dev., 1995, 5, 115-121; Takakura et al., Antisense & Nucl. Acid Drug Dev., 1996, 6, 177-183).
  • Excipients [0120]
  • In contrast to a carrier compound, a “pharmaceutical carrier” or “excipient” is a pharmaceutically acceptable solvent, suspending agent or any other pharmacologically inert vehicle for delivering one or more nucleic acids to an animal. The excipient may be liquid or solid and is selected, with the planned manner of administration in mind, so as to provide for the desired bulk, consistency, etc., when combined with a nucleic acid and the other components of a given pharmaceutical composition. Typical pharmaceutical carriers include, but are not limited to, binding agents (e.g., pregelatinized maize starch, polyvinylpyrrolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, etc.); fillers (e.g., lactose and other sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, pectin, gelatin, calcium sulfate, ethyl cellulose, polyacrylates or calcium hydrogen phosphate, etc.); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc, silica, colloidal silicon dioxide, stearic acid, metallic stearates, hydrogenated vegetable oils, corn starch, polyethylene glycols, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, etc.); disintegrants (e.g., starch, sodium starch glycolate, etc.); and wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate, etc.). [0121]
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic excipient suitable for non-parenteral administration which do not deleteriously react with nucleic acids can also be used to formulate the compositions of the present invention. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include, but are not limited to, water, salt solutions, alcohols, polyethylene glycols, gelatin, lactose, amylose, magnesium stearate, talc, silicic acid, viscous paraffin, hydroxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone and the like. [0122]
  • Formulations for topical administration of nucleic acids may include sterile and non-sterile aqueous solutions, non-aqueous solutions in common solvents such as alcohols, or solutions of the nucleic acids in liquid or solid oil bases. The solutions may also contain buffers, diluents and other suitable additives. Pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic excipients suitable for non-parenteral administration which do not deleteriously react with nucleic acids can be used. [0123]
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include, but are not limited to, water, salt solutions, alcohol, polyethylene glycols, gelatin, lactose, amylose, magnesium stearate, talc, silicic acid, viscous paraffin, hydroxymethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone and the like. [0124]
  • Other Components [0125]
  • The compositions of the present invention may additionally contain other adjunct components conventionally found in pharmaceutical compositions, at their art-established usage levels. Thus, for example, the compositions may contain additional, compatible, pharmaceutically-active materials such as, for example, antipruritics, astringents, local anesthetics or anti-inflammatory agents, or may contain additional materials useful in physically formulating various dosage forms of the compositions of the present invention, such as dyes, flavoring agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opacifiers, thickening agents and stabilizers. However, such materials, when added, should not unduly interfere with the biological activities of the components of the compositions of the present invention. The formulations can be sterilized and, if desired, mixed with auxiliary agents, e.g., lubricants, preservatives, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifiers, salts for influencing osmotic pressure, buffers, colorings, flavorings and/or aromatic substances and the like which do not deleteriously interact with the nucleic acid(s) of the formulation. [0126]
  • Aqueous suspensions may contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension including, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, sorbitol and/or dextran. The suspension may also contain stabilizers. [0127]
  • Certain embodiments of the invention provide pharmaceutical compositions containing (a) one or more antisense compounds and (b) one or more other chemotherapeutic agents which function by a non-antisense mechanism. Examples of such chemotherapeutic agents include but are not limited to daunorubicin, daunomycin, dactinomycin, doxorubicin, epirubicin, idarubicin, esorubicin, bleomycin, mafosfamide, ifosfamide, cytosine arabinoside, bis-chloroethylnitrosurea, busulfan, mitomycin C, actinomycin D, mithramycin, prednisone, hydroxyprogesterone, testosterone, tamoxifen, dacarbazine, procarbazine, hexamethylmelamine, pentamethylmelamine, mitoxantrone, amsacrine, chlorambucil, methylcyclohexylnitrosurea, nitrogen mustards, melphalan, cyclophosphamide, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-azacytidine, hydroxyurea, deoxycoformycin, 4-hydroxyperoxycyclophosphoramide, 5-fluorouracil (5-FU), 5-fluorodeoxyuridine (5-FUdR), methotrexate (MTX), colchicine, taxol, vincristine, vinblastine, etoposide (VP-16), trimetrexate, irinotecan, topotecan, gemcitabine, teniposide, cisplatin and diethylstilbestrol (DES). See, generally, [0128] The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 15th Ed. 1987, pp. 1206-1228, Berkow et al., eds., Rahway, N.J. When used with the compounds of the invention, such chemotherapeutic agents may be used individually (e.g., 5-FU and oligonucleotide), sequentially (e.g., 5-FU and oligonucleotide for a period of time followed by MTX and oligonucleotide), or in combination with one or more other such chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., 5-FU, MTX and oligonucleotide, or 5-FU, radiotherapy and oligonucleotide). Anti-inflammatory drugs, including but not limited to nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs and corticosteroids, and antiviral drugs, including but not limited to ribivirin, vidarabine, acyclovir and ganciclovir, may also be combined in compositions of the invention. See, generally, The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 15th Ed., Berkow et al., eds., 1987, Rahway, N.J., pages 2499-2506 and 46-49, respectively). Other non-antisense chemotherapeutic agents are also within the scope of this invention. Two or more combined compounds may be used together or sequentially.
  • In another related embodiment, compositions of the invention may contain one or more antisense compounds, particularly oligonucleotides, targeted to a first nucleic acid and one or more additional antisense compounds targeted to a second nucleic acid target. Numerous examples of antisense compounds are known in the art. Two or more combined compounds may be used together or sequentially. [0129]
  • The formulation of therapeutic compositions and their subsequent administration is believed to be within the skill of those in the art. Dosing is dependent on severity and responsiveness of the disease state to be treated, with the course of treatment lasting from several days to several months, or until a cure is effected or a diminution of the disease state is achieved. Optimal dosing schedules can be calculated from measurements of drug accumulation in the body of the patient. Persons of ordinary skill can easily determine optimum dosages, dosing methodologies and repetition rates. Optimum dosages may vary depending on the relative potency of individual oligonucleotides, and can generally be estimated based on EC[0130] 50s found to be effective in in vitro and in viva animal models. In general, dosage is from 0.01 ug to 100 g per kg of body weight, and may be given once or more daily, weekly, monthly or yearly, or even once every 2 to 20 years. Persons of ordinary skill in the art can easily estimate repetition rates for dosing based on measured residence times and concentrations of the drug in bodily fluids or tissues. Following successful treatment, it may be desirable to have the patient undergo maintenance therapy to prevent the recurrence of the disease state, wherein the oligonucleotide is administered in maintenance doses, ranging from 0.01 ug to 100 g per kg of body weight, once or more daily, to once every 20 years.
  • While the present invention has been described with specificity in accordance with certain of its preferred embodiments, the following examples serve only to illustrate the invention and are not intended to limit the same. [0131]
  • EXAMPLES Example 1 Nucleoside Phosphoramidites for Oligonucleotide Synthesis Deoxy and 2′-alkoxy Amidites
  • 2′-Deoxy and 2′-methoxy beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites were purchased from commercial sources (e.g. Chemgenes, Needham Mass. or Glen Research, Inc. Sterling Va.). Other 2′-O-alkoxy substituted nucleoside amidites are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,506,351, herein incorporated by reference. For oligonucleotides synthesized using 2′-alkoxy amidites, optimized synthesis cycles were developed that incorporate multiple steps coupling longer wait times relative to standard synthesis cycles. [0132]
  • The following abbreviations are used in the text: thin layer chromatography (TLC), melting point (MP), high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR), argon (Ar), methanol (MeOH), dichloromethane (CH[0133] 2Cl2), triethylamine (TEA), dimethyl formamide (DMF), ethyl acetate (EtOAc), dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), tetrahydrofuran (THF).
  • Oligonucleotides containing 5-methyl-2′-deoxycytidine (5-Me-dC) nucleotides were synthesized according to published methods (Sanghvi, et. al., [0134] Nucleic Acids Research, 1993, 21, 3197-3203) using commercially available phosphoramidites (Glen Research, Sterling Va. or ChemGenes, Needham Mass.) or prepared as follows:
  • Preparation of 5′-O-Dimethoxytrityl-thymidine Intermediate for 5-methyl dC Amidite [0135]
  • To a 50 L glass reactor equipped with air stirrer and Ar gas line was added thymidine (1.00 kg, 4.13 mol) in anhydrous pyridine (6 L) at ambient temperature. Dimethoxytrityl (DMT) chloride (1.47 kg, 4.34 mol, 1.05 eq) was added as a solid in four portions over 1 h. After 30 min, TLC indicated approx. 95% product, 2% thymidine, 5% DMT reagent and by-products and 2% 3′,5′-bis DMT product (Rf in EtOAc 0.45, 0.05, 0.98, 0.95 respectively). Saturated sodium bicarbonate (4 L) and CH[0136] 2Cl2 were added with stirring (pH of the aqueous layer 7.5). An additional 18 L of water was added, the mixture was stirred, the phases were separated, and the organic layer was transferred to a second 50 L vessel. The aqueous layer was extracted with additional CH2Cl2 (2×2 L). The combined organic layer was washed with water (10 L) and then concentrated in a rotary evaporator to approx. 3.6 kg total weight. This was redissolved in CH2Cl2 (3.5 L), added to the reactor followed by water (6 L) and hexanes (13 L). The mixture was vigorously stirred and seeded to give a fine white suspended solid starting at the interface. After stirring for 1 h, the suspension was removed by suction through a ½″ diameter teflon tube into a 20 L suction flask, poured onto a 25 cm Coors Buchner funnel, washed with water (2×3 L) and a mixture of hexanes-CH2Cl2 (4:1, 2×3 L) and allowed to air dry overnight in pans (1″ deep). This was further dried in a vacuum oven (75° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 48 h) to a constant weight of 2072 g (93%) of a white solid, (mp 122-124° C.). TLC indicated a trace contamination of the bis DMT product. NMR spectroscopy also indicated that 1-2 mole percent pyridine and about 5 mole percent of hexanes was still present.
  • Preparation of 5′-O-Dimethoxytrityl-2′-deoxy-5-methylcytidine Intermediate for 5-methyl-dC Amidite [0137]
  • To a 50 L Schott glass-lined steel reactor equipped with an electric stirrer, reagent addition pump (connected to an addition funnel), heating/cooling system, internal thermometer and an Ar gas line was added 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-thymidine (3.00 kg, 5.51 mol), anhydrous acetonitrile (25 L) and TEA (12.3 L, 88.4 mol, 16 eq). The mixture was chilled with stirring to −10° C. internal temperature (external −20° C.). Trimethylsilylchloride (2.1 L, 16.5 mol, 3.0 eq) was added over 30 minutes while maintaining the internal temperature below −5° C., followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). Note: the reaction is mildly exothermic and copious hydrochloric acid fumes form over the course of the addition. The reaction was allowed to warm to 0° C. and the reaction progress was confirmed by TLC (EtOAc-hexanes 4:1; R[0138] f 0.43 to 0.84 of starting material and silyl product, respectively). Upon completion, triazole (3.05 kg, 44 mol, 8.0 eq) was added the reaction was cooled to −20° C. internal temperature (external −30° C.). Phosphorous oxychloride (1035 mL, 11.1 mol, 2.01 eq) was added over 60 min so as to maintain the temperature between −20° C. and −10° C. during the strongly exothermic process, followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). The reaction was warmed to 0° C. and stirred for 1 h. TLC indicated a complete conversion to the triazole product (Rf 0.83 to 0.34 with the product spot glowing in long wavelength UV light). The reaction mixture was a peach-colored thick suspension, which turned darker red upon warming without apparent decomposition. The reaction was cooled to −15° C. internal temperature and water (5 L) was slowly added at a rate to maintain the temperature below +10° C. in order to quench the reaction and to form a homogenous solution. (Caution: this reaction is initially very strongly exothermic). Approximately one-half of the reaction volume (22 L) was transferred by air pump to another vessel, diluted with EtOAc (12 L) and extracted with water (2×8 L). The combined water layers were back-extracted with EtOAc (6 L). The water layer was discarded and the organic layers were concentrated in a 20 L rotary evaporator to an oily foam. The foam was coevaporated with anhydrous acetonitrile (4 L) to remove EtOAc. (note: dioxane may be used instead of anhydrous acetonitrile if dried to a hard foam). The second half of the reaction was treated in the same way. Each residue was dissolved in dioxane (3 L) and concentrated ammonium hydroxide (750 mL) was added. A homogenous solution formed in a few minutes and the reaction was allowed to stand overnight (although the reaction is complete within 1 h).
  • TLC indicated a complete reaction (product R[0139] f 0.35 in EtOAc-MeOH 4:1). The reaction solution was concentrated on a rotary evaporator to a dense foam. Each foam was slowly redissolved in warm EtOAc (4 L; 50° C.), combined in a 50 L glass reactor vessel, and extracted with water (2×4L) to remove the triazole by-product. The water was back-extracted with EtOAc (2 L). The organic layers were combined and concentrated to about 8 kg total weight, cooled to 0° C. and seeded with crystalline product. After 24 hours, the first crop was collected on a 25 cm Coors Buchner funnel and washed repeatedly with EtOAc (3×3L) until a white powder was left and then washed with ethyl ether (2×3L). The solid was put in pans (1″ deep) and allowed to air dry overnight. The filtrate was concentrated to an oil, then redissolved in EtOAc (2 L), cooled and seeded as before. The second crop was collected and washed as before (with proportional solvents) and the filtrate was first extracted with water (2×1L) and then concentrated to an oil. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc (1 L) and yielded a third crop which was treated as above except that more washing was required to remove a yellow oily layer.
  • After air-drying, the three crops were dried in a vacuum oven (50° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 24 h) to a constant weight (1750, 600 and 200 g, respectively) and combined to afford 2550 g (85%) of a white crystalline product (MP 215-217° C.) when TLC and NMR spectroscopy indicated purity. The mother liquor still contained mostly product (as determined by TLC) and a small amount of triazole (as determined by NMR spectroscopy), bis DMT product and unidentified minor impurities. If desired, the mother liquor can be purified by silica gel chromatography using a gradient of MeOH (0-25%) in EtOAc to further increase the yield. [0140]
  • Preparation of 5′-O-Dimethoxytrityl-2′-deoxy-N-4-benzoyl-5-methylcytidine Penultimate Intermediate for 5-methyl dC Amidite [0141]
  • Crystalline 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-methyl-2′-deoxycytidine (2000 g, 3.68 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (6.0 kg) at ambient temperature in a 50 L glass reactor vessel equipped with an air stirrer and argon line. Benzoic anhydride (Chem Impex not Aldrich, 874 g, 3.86 mol, 1.05 eq) was added and the reaction was stirred at ambient temperature for 8 h. TLC (CH[0142] 2Cl2-EtOAc; CH2Cl2-EtOAc 4:1; Rf 0.25) indicated approx. 92% complete reaction. An additional amount of benzoic anhydride (44 g, 0.19 mol) was added. After a total of 18 h, TLC indicated approx. 96% reaction completion. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (20 L), TEA (1020 mL, 7.36 mol, ca 2.0 eq) was added with stirring, and the mixture was extracted with water (15 L, then 2×10 L). The aqueous layer was removed (no back-extraction was needed) and the organic layer was concentrated in 2×20 L rotary evaporator flasks until a foam began to form. The residues were coevaporated with acetonitrile (1.5 L each) and dried (0.1 mm Hg, 25° C., 24 h) to 2520 g of a dense foam. High pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) revealed a contamination of 6.3% of N4, 3′-O-dibenzoyl product, but very little other impurities.
  • THe product was purified by Biotage column chromatography (5 kg Biotage) prepared with 65:35:1 hexanes-EtOAc-TEA (4L). The crude product (800 g),dissolved in CH[0143] 2Cl2 (2 L), was applied to the column. The column was washed with the 65:35:1 solvent mixture (20 kg), then 20:80:1 solvent mixture (10 kg), then 99:1 EtOAc:TEA (17 kg). The fractions containing the product were collected, and any fractions containing the product and impurities were retained to be resubjected to column chromatography. The column was re-equilibrated with the original 65:35:1 solvent mixture (17 kg). A second batch of crude product (840 g) was applied to the column as before. The column was washed with the following solvent gradients: 65:35:1 (9 kg), 55:45:1 (20 kg), 20:80:1 (10 kg), and 99:1 EtOAc:TEA (15 kg). The column was reequilibrated as above, and a third batch of the crude product (850 g) plus impure fractions recycled from the two previous columns (28 g) was purified following the procedure for the second batch. The fractions containing pure product combined and concentrated on a 20L rotary evaporator, co-evaporated with acetontirile (3 L) and dried (0.1 mm Hg, 48 h, 25° C.) to a constant weight of 2023 g (85%) of white foam and 20 g of slightly contaminated product from the third run. HPLC indicated a purity of 99.8% with the balance as the diBenzoyl product.
  • [5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-deoxy-N[0144] 4-benzoyl-5-methylcytidin-3′-O-yl]-2-cyanoethyl-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite (5-methyl dC Amidite)
  • 5′-O— (4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-deoxy-N[0145] 4-benzoyl-5-methylcytidine (998 g, 1.5 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (2 L). The solution was co-evaporated with toluene (300 ml) at 50° C. under reduced pressure, then cooled to room temperature and 2-cyanoethyl tetraisopropylphosphorodiamidite (680 g, 2.26 mol) and tetrazole (52.5 g, 0.75 mol) were added. The mixture was shaken until all tetrazole was dissolved, N-methylimidazole (15 ml) was added and the mixture was left at room temperature for 5 hours. TEA (300 ml) was added, the mixture was diluted with DMF (2.5 L) and water (600 ml), and extracted with hexane (3×3 L). The mixture was diluted with water (1.2 L) and extracted with a mixture of toluene (7.5 L) and hexane (6 L). The two layers were separated, the upper layer was washed with DMF-water (7:3 v/v, 3×2 L) and water (3×2 L), and the phases were separated. The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and rotary evaporated. The residue was co-evaporated with acetonitrile (2×2 L) under reduced pressure and dried to a constant weight (25° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 40 h) to afford 1250 g an off-white foam solid (96%).
  • 2′-Fluoro Amidites [0146]
  • 2′-Fluorodeoxyadenosine Amidites [0147]
  • 2′-fluoro oligonucleotides were synthesized as described previously [Kawasaki, et. al., [0148] J. Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 831-841] and U.S. Pat. No. 5,670,633, herein incorporated by reference. The preparation of 2′-fluoropyrimidines containing a 5-methyl substitution are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,493. Briefly, the protected nucleoside N6-benzoyl-2′-deoxy-2′-fluoroadenosine was synthesized utilizing commercially available 9-beta-D-arabinofuranosyladenine as starting material and whereby the 2′-alpha-fluoro atom is introduced by a SN2-displacement of a 2′-beta-triflate group. Thus N6-benzoyl-9-beta-D-arabinofuranosyladenine was selectively protected in moderate yield as the 3′,5′-ditetrahydropyranyl (THP) intermediate. Deprotection of the THP and N6-benzoyl groups was accomplished using standard methodologies to obtain the 5′-dimethoxytrityl-(DMT) and 5′-DMT-3′-phosphoramidite intermediates.
  • 2′-Fluorodeoxyguanosine [0149]
  • The synthesis of 2′-deoxy-2′-fluoroguanosine was accomplished using tetraisopropyldisiloxanyl (TPDS) protected 9-beta-D-arabinofuranosylguanine as starting material, and conversion to the intermediate isobutyryl-arabinofuranosylguanosine. Alternatively, isobutyryl-arabinofuranosylguanosine was prepared as described by Ross et al., (Nucleosides & Nucleosides, 16, 1645, 1997). Deprotection of the TPDS group was followed by protection of the hydroxyl group with THP to give isobutyryl di-THP protected arabinofuranosylguanine. Selective O-deacylation and triflation was followed by treatment of the crude product with fluoride, then deprotection of the THP groups. Standard methodologies were used to obtain the 5′-DMT- and 5′-DMT-3′-phosphoramidites. [0150]
  • 2′-Fluorouridine [0151]
  • Synthesis of 2′-deoxy-2′-fluorouridine was accomplished by the modification of a literature procedure in which 2,2′-anhydro-1-beta-D-arabinofuranosyluracil was treated with 70% hydrogen fluoride-pyridine. Standard procedures were used to obtain the 5′-DMT and 5′-DMT-3′phosphoramidites. [0152]
  • 2′-Fluorodeoxycytidine [0153]
  • 2′-deoxy-2′-fluorocytidine was synthesized via amination of 2′-deoxy-2′-fluorouridine, followed by selective protection to give N4-benzoyl-2′-deoxy-2′-fluorocytidine. Standard procedures were used to obtain the 5′-DMT and 5′-DMT-3′phosphoramidites. [0154]
  • 2′-O-(2-Methoxyethyl) Modified Amidites [0155]
  • 2′-O-Methoxyethyl-substituted nucleoside amidites (otherwise known as MOE amidites) are prepared as follows, or alternatively, as per the methods of Martin, P., (Helvetica Chimica Acta, 1995, 78, 486-504). [0156]
  • Preparation of 2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyluridine Intermediate [0157]
  • 2,2′-Anhydro-5-methyl-uridine (2000 g, 8.32 mol), tris(2-methoxyethyl)borate (2504 g, 10.60 mol), sodium bicarbonate (60 g, 0.70 mol) and anhydrous 2-methoxyethanol (5 L) were combined in a 12 L three necked flask and heated to 130° C. (internal temp) at atmospheric pressure, under an argon atmosphere with stirring for 21 h. TLC indicated a complete reaction. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure until a sticky gum formed (50-85° C. bath temp and 100-11 mm Hg) and the residue was redissolved in water (3 L) and heated to boiling for 30 min in order the hydrolyze the borate esters. The water was removed under reduced pressure until a foam began to form and then the process was repeated. HPLC indicated about 77% product, 15% dimer (5′ of product attached to 2′ of starting material) and unknown derivatives, and the balance was a single unresolved early eluting peak. [0158]
  • The gum was redissolved in brine (3 L), and the flask was rinsed with additional brine (3 L). The combined aqueous solutions were extracted with chloroform (20 L) in a heavier-than continuous extractor for 70 h. The chloroform layer was concentrated by rotary evaporation in a 20 L flask to a sticky foam (2400 g). This was coevaporated with MeOH (400 mL) and EtOAc (8 L) at 75° C. and 0.65 atm until the foam dissolved at which point the vacuum was lowered to about 0.5 atm. After 2.5 L of distillate was collected a precipitate began to form and the flask was removed from the rotary evaporator and stirred until the suspension reached ambient temperature. EtOAc (2 L) was added and the slurry was filtered on a 25 cm table top Buchner funnel and the product was washed with EtOAc (3×2 L). The bright white solid was air dried in pans for 24 h then further dried in a vacuum oven (50° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 24 h) to afford 1649 g of a white crystalline solid (mp 115.5-116.5° C.). [0159]
  • The brine layer in the 20 L continuous extractor was further extracted for 72 h with recycled chloroform. The chloroform was concentrated to 120 g of oil and this was combined with the mother liquor from the above filtration (225 g), dissolved in brine (250 mL) and extracted once with chloroform (250 mL). The brine solution was continuously extracted and the product was crystallized as described above to afford an additional 178 g of crystalline product containing about 2% of thymine. The combined yield was 1827 g (69.4%). HPLC indicated about 99.5% purity with the balance being the dimer. [0160]
  • Preparation of 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyluridine Penultimate Intermediate [0161]
  • In a 50 L glass-lined steel reactor, 2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyl-uridine (MOE-T, 1500 g, 4.738 mol), lutidine (1015 g, 9.476 mol) were dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (15 L). The solution was stirred rapidly and chilled to −10° C. (internal temperature). Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl chloride (1765.7 g, 5.21 mol) was added as a solid in one portion. The reaction was allowed to warm to −2° C. over 1 h. (Note: The reaction was monitored closely by TLC (EtOAc) to determine when to stop the reaction so as to not generate the undesired bis-DMT substituted side product). The reaction was allowed to warm from −2 to 3° C. over 25 min. then quenched by adding MeOH (300 mL) followed after 10 min by toluene (16 L) and water (16 L). The solution was transferred to a clear 50 L vessel with a bottom outlet, vigorously stirred for 1 minute, and the layers separated. The aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer was washed successively with 10% aqueous citric acid (8 L) and water (12 L). The product was then extracted into the aqueous phase by washing the toluene solution with aqueous sodium hydroxide (0.5N, 16 L and 8 L). The combined aqueous layer was overlayed with toluene (12 L) and solid citric acid (8 moles, 1270 g) was added with vigorous stirring to lower the pH of the aqueous layer to 5.5 and extract the product into the toluene. The organic layer was washed with water (10 L) and TLC of the organic layer indicated a trace of DMT-O-Me, bis DMT and dimer DMT. [0162]
  • The toluene solution was applied to a silica gel column (6 L sintered glass funnel containing approx. 2 kg of silica gel slurried with toluene (2 L) and TEA (25 mL)) and the fractions were eluted with toluene (12 L) and EtOAc (3×4 L) using vacuum applied to a filter flask placed below the column. The first EtOAc fraction containing both the desired product and impurities were resubjected to column chromatography as above. The clean fractions were combined, rotary evaporated to a foam, coevaporated with acetonitrile (6 L) and dried in a vacuum oven (0.1 mm Hg, 40 h, 40° C.) to afford 2850 g of a white crisp foam. NMR spectroscopy indicated a 0.25 mole % remainder of acetonitrile (calculates to be approx. 47 g) to give a true dry weight of 2803 g (96%). HPLC indicated that the product was 99.41% pure, with the remainder being 0.06 DMT-O-Me, 0.10 unknown, 0.44 bis DMT, and no detectable dimer DMT or 3′-O-DMT. [0163]
  • Preparation of [5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyluridin-3′-O-yl]-2-cyanoethyl-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite (MOE T Amidite) [0164]
  • 5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyluridine (1237 g, 2.0 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (2.5 L). The solution was co-evaporated with toluene (200 ml) at 50° C. under reduced pressure, then cooled to room temperature and 2-cyanoethyl tetraisopropylphosphorodiamidite (900 g, 3.0 mol) and tetrazole (70 g, 1.0 mol) were added. The mixture was shaken until all tetrazole was dissolved, N-methylimidazole (20 ml) was added and the solution was left at room temperature for 5 hours. TEA (300 ml) was added, the mixture was diluted with DMF (3.5 L) and water (600 ml) and extracted with hexane (3×3L). The mixture was diluted with water (1.6 L) and extracted with the mixture of toluene (12 L) and hexanes (9 L). The upper layer was washed with DMF-water (7:3 v/v, 3×3 L) and water (3×3 L). The organic layer was dried (Na[0165] 2SO4), filtered and evaporated. The residue was co-evaporated with acetonitrile (2×2 L) under reduced pressure and dried in a vacuum oven (25° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 40 h) to afford 1526 g of an off-white foamy solid (95%).
  • Preparation of 5′-O-Dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methylcytidine Intermediate [0166]
  • To a 50 L Schott glass-lined steel reactor equipped with an electric stirrer, reagent addition pump (connected to an addition funnel), heating/cooling system, internal thermometer and argon gas line was added 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyl-uridine (2.616 kg, 4.23 mol, purified by base extraction only and no scrub column), anhydrous acetonitrile (20 L), and TEA (9.5 L, 67.7 mol, 16 eq). The mixture was chilled with stirring to −10° C. internal temperature (external −20° C.). Trimethylsilylchloride (1.60 L, 12.7 mol, 3.0 eq) was added over 30 min. while maintaining the internal temperature below −5° C., followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). (Note: the reaction is mildly exothermic and copious hydrochloric acid fumes form over the course of the addition). The reaction was allowed to warm to 0° C. and the reaction progress was confirmed by TLC (EtOAc, R[0167] f 0.68 and 0.87 for starting material and silyl product, respectively). Upon completion, triazole (2.34 kg, 33.8 mol, 8.0 eq) was added the reaction was cooled to −20° C. internal temperature (external −30° C.). Phosphorous oxychloride (793 mL, 8.51 mol, 2.01 eq) was added slowly over 60 min so as to maintain the temperature between −20° C. and −10° C. (note: strongly exothermic), followed by a wash of anhydrous acetonitrile (1 L). The reaction was warmed to 0° C. and stirred for 1 h, at which point it was an off-white thick suspension. TLC indicated a complete conversion to the triazole product (EtOAc, Rf 0.87 to 0.75 with the product spot glowing in long wavelength UV light). The reaction was cooled to −15° C. and water (5 L) was slowly added at a rate to maintain the temperature below +10° C. in order to quench the reaction and to form a homogenous solution. (Caution: this reaction is initially very strongly exothermic). Approximately one-half of the reaction volume (22 L) was transferred by air pump to another vessel, diluted with EtOAc (12 L) and extracted with water (2×8 L). The second half of the reaction was treated in the same way. The combined aqueous layers were back-extracted with EtOAc (8 L) The organic layers were combined and concentrated in a 20 L rotary evaporator to an oily foam. The foam was coevaporated with anhydrous acetonitrile (4 L) to remove EtOAc. (note: dioxane may be used instead of anhydrous acetonitrile if dried to a hard foam). The residue was dissolved in dioxane (2 L) and concentrated ammonium hydroxide (750 mL) was added. A homogenous solution formed in a few minutes and the reaction was allowed to stand overnight
  • TLC indicated a complete reaction (CH[0168] 2Cl2-acetone-MeOH, 20:5:3, Rf 0.51). The reaction solution was concentrated on a rotary evaporator to a dense foam and slowly redissolved in warm CH2Cl2 (4 L, 40° C.) and transferred to a 20 L glass extraction vessel equipped with a air-powered stirrer. The organic layer was extracted with water (2×6 L) to remove the triazole by-product. (Note: In the first extraction an emulsion formed which took about 2 h to resolve). The water layer was back-extracted with CH2Cl2 (2×2 L), which in turn was washed with water (3 L). The combined organic layer was concentrated in 2×20 L flasks to a gum and then recrystallized from EtOAc seeded with crystalline product. After sitting overnight, the first crop was collected on a 25 cm Coors Buchner funnel and washed repeatedly with EtOAc until a white free-flowing powder was left (about 3×3 L). The filtrate was concentrated to an oil recrystallized from EtOAc, and collected as above. The solid was air-dried in pans for 48 h, then further dried in a vacuum oven (50° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 17 h) to afford 2248 g of a bright white, dense solid (86%). An HPLC analysis indicated both crops to be 99.4% pure and NMR spectroscopy indicated only a faint trace of EtOAc remained.
  • Preparation of 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N-4-benzoyl-5-methyl-cytidine Penultimate Intermediate: [0169]
  • Crystalline 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-5-methyl-cytidine (1000 g, 1.62 mol) was suspended in anhydrous DMF (3 kg) at ambient temperature and stirred under an Ar atmosphere. Benzoic anhydride (439.3 g, 1.94 mol) was added in one portion. The solution clarified after 5 hours and was stirred for 16 h. HPLC indicated 0.45% starting material remained (as well as 0.32% N4, 3′-O-bis Benzoyl). An additional amount of benzoic anhydride (6.0 g, 0.0265 mol) was added and after 17 h, HPLC indicated no starting material was present. TEA (450 mL, 3.24 mol) and toluene (6 L) were added with stirring for 1 minute. The solution was washed with water (4×4 L), and brine (2×4 L). The organic layer was partially evaporated on a 20 L rotary evaporator to remove 4 L of toluene and traces of water. HPLC indicated that the bis benzoyl side product was present as a 6% impurity. The residue was diluted with toluene (7 L) and anhydrous DMSO (200 mL, 2.82 mol) and sodium hydride (60% in oil, 70 g, 1.75 mol) was added in one portion with stirring at ambient temperature over 1 h. The reaction was quenched by slowly adding then washing with aqueous citric acid (10%, 100 mL over 10 min, then 2×4 L), followed by aqueous sodium bicarbonate (2%, 2 L), water (2×4 L) and brine (4 L). The organic layer was concentrated on a 20 L rotary evaporator to about 2 L total volume. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (6 L Buchner funnel containing 1.5 kg of silica gel wetted with a solution of EtOAc-hexanes-TEA (70:29:1)). The product was eluted with the same solvent (30 L) followed by straight EtOAc (6 L). The fractions containing the product were combined, concentrated on a rotary evaporator to a foam and then dried in a vacuum oven (50° C., 0.2 mm Hg, 8 h) to afford 1155 g of a crisp, white foam (98%). HPLC indicated a purity of >99.7%. [0170]
  • Preparation of [5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N[0171] 4-benzoyl-5-methylcytidin-3′-O-yl]-2-cyanoethyl-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite (MOE 5-Me-C Amidite)
  • 5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N[0172] 4-benzoyl-5-methylcytidine (1082 g, 1.5 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (2 L) and co-evaporated with toluene (300 ml) at 50° C. under reduced pressure. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and 2-cyanoethyl tetraisopropylphosphorodiamidite (680 g, 2.26 mol) and tetrazole (52.5 g, 0.75 mol) were added. The mixture was shaken until all tetrazole was dissolved, N-methylimidazole (30 ml) was added, and the mixture was left at room temperature for 5 hours. TEA (300 ml) was added, the mixture was diluted with DMF (1 L) and water (400 ml) and extracted with hexane (3×3 L). The mixture was diluted with water (1.2 L) and extracted with a mixture of toluene (9 L) and hexanes (6 L). The two layers were separated and the upper layer was washed with DMF-water (60:40 v/v, 3×3 L) and water (3×2 L). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated. The residue was co-evaporated with acetonitrile (2×2 L) under reduced pressure and dried in a vacuum oven (25° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 40 h) to afford 1336 g of an off-white foam (97%).
  • Preparation of [5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N[0173] 6-benzoyladenosin-3′-O-yl]-2-cyanoethyl-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite (MOE A Amdite)
  • 5′′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N[0174] 6-benzoyladenosine (purchased from Reliable Biopharmaceutical, St. Lois, Mo.), 1098 g, 1.5 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (3 L) and co-evaporated with toluene (300 ml) at 50° C. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and 2-cyanoethyl tetraisopropylphosphorodiamidite (680 g, 2.26 mol) and tetrazole (78.8 g, 1.24 mol) were added. The mixture was shaken until all tetrazole was dissolved, N-methylimidazole (30 ml) was added, and mixture was left at room temperature for 5 hours. TEA (300 ml) was added, the mixture was diluted with DMF (1 L) and water (400 ml) and extracted with hexanes (3×3 L). The mixture was diluted with water (1.4 L) and extracted with the mixture of toluene (9 L) and hexanes (6 L). The two layers were separated and the upper layer was washed with DMF-water (60:40, v/v, 3×3 L) and water (3×2 L). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated to a sticky foam. The residue was co-evaporated with acetonitrile (2.5 L) under reduced pressure and dried in a vacuum oven (25° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 40 h) to afford 1350 g of an off-white foam solid (96%).
  • Prepartion of [5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N[0175] 4-isobutyrylguanosin-3′-O-yl]-2-cyanoethyl-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite (MOE G Amidite)
  • 5′-O-(4,4′-Dimethoxytriphenylmethyl)-2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)-N[0176] 4-isobutyrlguanosine (purchased from Reliable Biopharmaceutical, St. Louis, Mo., 1426 g, 2.0 mol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (2 L). The solution was co-evaporated with toluene (200 ml) at 50° C., cooled to room temperature and 2-cyanoethyl tetraisopropylphosphorodiamidite (900 g, 3.0 mol) and tetrazole (68 g, 0.97 mol) were added. The mixture was shaken until all tetrazole was dissolved, N-methylimidazole (30 ml) was added, and the mixture was left at room temperature for 5 hours. TEA (300 ml) was added, the mixture was diluted with DMF (2 L) and water (600 ml) and extracted with hexanes (3×3 L). The mixture was diluted with water (2 L) and extracted with a mixture of toluene (10 L) and hexanes (5 L). The two layers were separated and the upper layer was washed with DMF-water (60:40, v/v, 3×3 L). EtOAc (4 L) was added and the solution was washed with water (3×4 L). The organic layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated to approx. 4 kg. Hexane (4 L) was added, the mixture was shaken for 10 min, and the supernatant liquid was decanted. The residue was co-evaporated with acetonitrile (2×2 L) under reduced pressure and dried in a vacuum oven (25° C., 0.1 mm Hg, 40 h) to afford 1660 g of an off-white foamy solid (91%).
  • 2′-O-(Aminooxyethyl) Nucleoside Amidites and 2′-O-(dimethylaminooxyethyl) Nucleoside Amidites [0177]
  • 2′-(Dimethylaminooxyethoxy) Nucleoside Amidites [0178]
  • 2′-(Dimethylaminooxyethoxy) nucleoside amidites (also known in the art as 2′-O-(dimethylaminooxyethyl) nucleoside amidites) are prepared as described in the following paragraphs. Adenosine, cytidine and guanosine nucleoside amidites are prepared similarly to the thymidine (5-methyluridine) except the exocyclic amines are protected with a benzoyl moiety in the case of adenosine and cytidine and with isobutyryl in the case of guanosine. [0179]
  • 5′-O-tert-Butyldiphenylsilyl-0[0180] 2-2′-anhydro-5-methyluridine
  • O[0181] 2-2′-anhydro-5-methyluridine (Pro. Bio. Sint., Varese, Italy, 100.0 g, 0.416 mmol), dimethylaminopyridine (0.66 g, 0.013 eq, 0.0054 mmol) were dissolved in dry pyridine (500 ml) at ambient temperature under an argon atmosphere and with mechanical stirring. tert-Butyldiphenylchlorosilane (125.8 g, 119.0 mL, 1.1 eq, 0.458 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction was stirred for 16 h at ambient temperature. TLC (Rf 0.22, EtOAc) indicated a complete reaction. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. This was partitioned between CH2Cl2 (1 L) and saturated sodium bicarbonate (2×1 L) and brine (1 L). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The oil was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of EtOAc and ethyl ether (600 mL) and cooling the solution to −10° C. afforded a white crystalline solid which was collected by filtration, washed with ethyl ether (3×200 mL) and dried (40° C., 1 mm Hg, 24 h) to afford 149 g of white solid (74.8%). TLC and NMR spectroscopy were consistent with pure product.
  • 5′-O-tert-Butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5-methyluridine [0182]
  • In the fume hood, ethylene glycol (350 mL, excess) was added cautiously with manual stirring to a 2 L stainless steel pressure reactor containing borane in tetrahydrofuran (1.0 M, 2.0 eq, 622 mL). (Caution: evolves hydrogen gas). 5′-O-tert-Butyldiphenylsilyl-O[0183] 2-2′-anhydro-5-methyluridine (149 g, 0.311 mol) and sodium bicarbonate (0.074 g, 0.003 eq) were added with manual stirring. The reactor was sealed and heated in an oil bath until an internal temperature of 160° C. was reached and then maintained for 16 h (pressure <100 psig). The reaction vessel was cooled to ambient temperature and opened. TLC (EtOAc, Rf 0.67 for desired product and Rf 0.82 for ara-T side product) indicated about 70% conversion to the product. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure (10 to 1 mm Hg) in a warm water bath (40-100° C.) with the more extreme conditions used to remove the ethylene glycol. (Alternatively, once the THF has evaporated the solution can be diluted with water and the product extracted into EtOAc). The residue was purified by column chromatography (2 kg silica gel, EtOAc-hexanes gradient 1:1 to 4:1). The appropriate fractions were combined, evaporated and dried to afford 84 g of a white crisp foam (50%), contaminated starting material (17.4 g, 12% recovery) and pure reusable starting material (20 g, 13% recovery). TLC and NMR spectroscopy were consistent with 99% pure product.
  • 2′-O-([2-phthalimidoxy)ethyl]-5′-t-butyldiphenylsilyl-5-methyluridine [0184]
  • 5′-O-tert-Butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5-methyluridine (20 g, 36.98 mmol) was mixed with triphenylphosphine (11.63 g, 44.36 mmol) and N-hydroxyphthalimide (7.24 g, 44.36 mmol) and dried over P[0185] 2O5 under high vacuum for two days at 40° C. The reaction mixture was flushed with argon and dissolved in dry THF (369.8 mL, Aldrich, sure seal bottle). Diethyl-azodicarboxylate (6.98 mL, 44.36 mmol) was added dropwise to the reaction mixture with the rate of addition maintained such that the resulting deep red coloration is just discharged before adding the next drop. The reaction mixture was stirred for 4 hrs., after which time TLC (EtOAc:hexane, 60:40) indicated that the reaction was complete. The solvent was evaporated in vacuuo and the residue purified by flash column chromatography (eluted with 60:40 EtOAc:hexane), to yield 2′-O— ([2-phthalimidoxy)ethyl]-5′-t-butyldiphenylsilyl-5-methyluridine as white foam (21.819 g, 86%) upon rotary evaporation.
  • 5′-O-tert-butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[(2-formadoximinooxy)ethyl]-5-methyluridine [0186]
  • 2′-O-([2-phthalimidoxy)ethyl]-5′-t-butyldiphenylsilyl-5-methyluridine (3.1 g, 4.5 mmol) was dissolved in dry CH[0187] 2Cl2 (4.5 mL) and methylhydrazine (300 mL, 4.64 mmol) was added dropwise at −10° C. to 0° C. After 1 h the mixture was filtered, the filtrate washed with ice cold CH2Cl2, and the combined organic phase was washed with water and brine and dried (anhydrous Na2SO4). The solution was filtered and evaporated to afford 2′-O-(aminooxyethyl) thymidine, which was then dissolved in MeOH (67.5 mL). Formaldehyde (20% aqueous solution, w/w, 1.1 eq.) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 1 h. The solvent was removed under vacuum and the residue was purified by column chromatography to yield 5′-O-tert-butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[(2-formadoximinooxy) ethyl]-5-methyluridine as white foam (1.95 g, 78%) upon rotary evaporation.
  • 5′-O-tert-Butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[N,N dimethylaminooxyethyl]-5-methyluridine [0188]
  • 5′-O-tert-butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[(2-formadoximinooxy)ethyl]-5-methyluridine (1.77 g, 3.12 mmol) was dissolved in a solution of 1M pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate (PPTS) in dry MeOH (30.6 mL) and cooled to 10° C. under inert atmosphere. Sodium cyanoborohydride (0.39 g, 6.13 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred. After 10 minutes the reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 2 h. while the progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC (5% MeOH in CH[0189] 2Cl2). Aqueous NaHCO3 solution (5%, 10 mL) was added and the product was extracted with EtOAc (2×20 mL). The organic phase was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and evaporated to dryness. This entire procedure was repeated with the resulting residue, with the exception that formaldehyde (20% w/w, 30 mL, 3.37 mol) was added upon dissolution of the residue in the PPTS/MeOH solution. After the extraction and evaporation, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography and (eluted with 5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to afford 5′-O-tert-butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[N,N-dimethylaminooxyethyl]-5-methyluridine as a white foam (14.6 g, 80%) upon rotary evaporation.
  • 2′-O-(dimethylaminooxyethyl)-5-methyluridine [0190]
  • Triethylamine trihydrofluoride (3.91 mL, 24.0 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF and TEA (1.67 mL, 12 mmol, dry, stored over KOH) and added to 5[0191] 1-O-tert-butyldiphenylsilyl-2′-O-[N,N-dimethylaminooxyethyl]-5-methyluridine (1.40 g, 2.4 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 24 hrs and monitored by TLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2). The solvent was removed under vacuum and the residue purified by flash column chromatography (eluted with 10% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to afford 2′-O-(dimethylaminooxyethyl)-5-methyluridine (766 mg, 92.5%) upon rotary evaporation of the solvent.
  • 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-(dimethylaminooxyethyl)-5-methyluridine [0192]
  • 2′-O— (dimethylaminooxyethyl)-5-methyluridine (750 mg, 2.17 mmol) was dried over P[0193] 2O5 under high vacuum overnight at 40° C., co-evaporated with anhydrous pyridine (20 mL), and dissolved in pyridine (11 mL) under argon atmosphere. 4-dimethylaminopyridine (26.5 mg, 2.60 mmol) and 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl chloride (880 mg, 2.60 mmol) were added to the pyridine solution and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature until all of the starting material had reacted. Pyridine was removed under vacuum and the residue was purified by column chromatography (eluted with 10% MeOH in CH2Cl2 containing a few drops of pyridine) to yield 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-(dimethylamino-oxyethyl)-5-methyluridine (1.13 g, 80%) upon rotary evaporation.
  • 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-(2-N,N-dimethylaminooxyethyl)-S-methyluridine-3′-[(2-cyanoethyl)-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite][0194]
  • 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-(dimethylaminooxyethyl)-5-methyluridine (1.08 g, 1.67 mmol) was co-evaporated with toluene (20 mL), N,N-diisopropylamine tetrazonide (0.29 g, 1.67 mmol) was added and the mixture was dried over P[0195] 2O5 under high vacuum overnight at 40° C. This was dissolved in anhydrous acetonitrile (8.4 mL) and 2-cyanoethyl-N,N,N1,N1-tetraisopropylphosphoramidite (2.12 mL, 6.08 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 h under inert atmosphere. The progress of the reaction was monitored by TLC (hexane:EtOAc 1:1). The solvent was evaporated, then the residue was dissolved in EtOAc (70 mL) and washed with 5% aqueous NaHCO3 (40 mL). The EtOAc layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. The residue obtained was purified by column chromatography (EtOAc as eluent) to afford 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-(2-N,N-dimethylaminooxyethyl)-5-methyluridine-3′-[(2-cyanoethyl)-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite] as a foam (1.04 g, 74.9%) upon rotary evaporation.
  • 2′-(Aminooxyethoxy) Nucleoside Amidites [0196]
  • 2′-(Aminooxyethoxy) nucleoside amidites (also known in the art as 2′-O-(aminooxyethyl) nucleoside amidites) are prepared as described in the following paragraphs. Adenosine, cytidine and thymidine nucleoside amidites are prepared similarly. [0197]
  • N2-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine-3′-[(2-cyanoethyl)-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite][0198]
  • The 2′-O-aminooxyethyl guanosine analog may be obtained by selective 2′-O-alkylation of diaminopurine riboside. Multigram quantities of diaminopurine riboside may be purchased from Schering AG (Berlin) to provide 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl) diaminopurine riboside along with aminor amount of the 3′-O-isomer. 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl) diaminopurine riboside may be resolved and converted to 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)guanosine by treatment with adenosine deaminase. (McGee, D. P. C., Cook, P. D., Guinosso, C. J., WO 94/02501 A1 940203.) Standard protection procedures should afford 2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)-51-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine and 2-N-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-(2-ethylacetyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine which may be reduced to provide 2-N-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-(2-hydroxyethyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine. As before the hydroxyl group may be displaced by N-hydroxyphthalimide via a Mitsunobu reaction, and the protected nucleoside may be phosphitylated as usual to yield 2-N-isobutyryl-6-O-diphenylcarbamoyl-2′-O-([2-phthalmidoxy]ethyl)-5′-O-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityl)guanosine-3′-[(2-cyanoethyl)-N,N-diisopropylphosphoramidite]. [0199]
  • 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy (2′-DMAEOE) Nucleoside Amidites [0200]
  • 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy nucleoside amidites (also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl, i.e., 2′-O—CH[0201] 2—O—CH2—N(CH2)2, or 2′-DMAEOE nucleoside amidites) are prepared as follows. Other nucleoside amidites are prepared similarly.
  • 2′-O-[2(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethoxy)ethyl]-5-methyl Uridine [0202]
  • 2[2-(Dimethylamino)ethoxy]ethanol (Aldrich, 6.66 g, 50 mmol) was slowly added to a solution of borane in tetra-hydrofuran (1 M, 10 mL, 10 mmol) with stirring in a 100 mL bomb. (Caution: Hydrogen gas evolves as the solid dissolves). O[0203] 2-,2′-anhydro-5-methyluridine (1.2 g, 5 mmol), and sodium bicarbonate (2.5 mg) were added and the bomb was sealed, placed in an oil bath and heated to 155° C. for 26 h. then cooled to room temperature. The crude solution was concentrated, the residue was diluted with water (200 mL) and extracted with hexanes (200 mL). The product was extracted from the aqueous layer with EtOAc (3×200 mL) and the combined organic layers were washed once with water, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (eluted with 5:100:2 MeOH/CH2Cl2/TEA) as the eluent. The appropriate fractions were combined and evaporated to afford the product as a white solid.
  • 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-[2(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethoxy) ethyl)]-5-methyl Uridine [0204]
  • To 0.5 g (1.3 mmol) of 2′-O-[2(2-N,N-dimethylamino-ethoxy)ethyl)]-5-methyl uridine in anhydrous pyridine (8 mL), was added TEA (0.36 mL) and dimethoxytrityl chloride (DMT-Cl, 0.87 g, 2 eq.) and the reaction was stirred for 1 h. The reaction mixture was poured into water (200 mL) and extracted with CH[0205] 2Cl2 (2×200 mL). The combined CH2Cl2 layers were washed with saturated NaHCO3 solution, followed by saturated NaCl solution, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (eluted with 5:100:1 MeOH/CH2Cl2/TEA) to afford the product.
  • 5′-O-Dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-[2(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethoxy)-ethyl)]-5-methyl uridine-3′-O-(cyanoethyl-N,N-diisopropyl)phosphoramidite [0206]
  • Diisopropylaminotetrazolide (0.6 g) and 2-cyanoethoxy-N,N-diisopropyl phosphoramidite (1.1 mL, 2 eq.) were added to a solution of 5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-[2(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethoxy)ethyl)]-5-methyluridine (2.17 g, 3 mmol) dissolved in CH[0207] 2Cl2 (20 mL) under an atmosphere of argon. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight and the solvent evaporated. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography with EtOAc as the eluent to afford the title compound.
  • Example 2
  • Oligonucleotide Synthesis [0208]
  • Unsubstituted and substituted phosphodiester (P═O) oligonucleotides are synthesized on an automated DNA synthesizer (Applied Biosystems model 394) using standard phosphoramidite chemistry with oxidation by iodine. [0209]
  • Phosphorothioates (P═S) are synthesized similar to phosphodiester oligonucleotides with the following exceptions: thiation was effected by utilizing a 10% w/v solution of 3H-1,2-benzodithiole-3-one 1,1-dioxide in acetonitrile for the oxidation of the phosphite linkages. The thiation reaction step time was increased to 180 sec and preceded by the normal capping step. After cleavage from the CPG column and deblocking in concentrated ammonium hydroxide at 55° C. (12-16 hr), the oligonucleotides were recovered by precipitating with >3 volumes of ethanol from a 1 M NH[0210] 4oAc solution. Phosphinate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Alkyl phosphonate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863, herein incorporated by reference. [0211]
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylene phosphonate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,610,289 or 5,625,050, herein incorporated by reference. [0212]
  • Phosphoramidite oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Patent, 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878, herein incorporated by reference. [0213]
  • Alkylphosphonothioate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in published PCT applications PCT/US94/00902 and PCT/US93/06976 (published as WO 94/17093 and WO 94/02499, respectively), herein incorporated by reference. [0214]
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925, herein incorporated by reference. [0215]
  • Phosphotriester oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243, herein incorporated by reference. [0216]
  • Borano phosphate oligonucleotides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198, both herein incorporated by reference. [0217]
  • Example 3
  • Oligonucleoside Synthesis [0218]
  • Methylenemethylimino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MMI linked oligonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MDH linked oligonucleosides, and methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-3 linked oligonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-4 linked oligonucleosides, as well as mixed backbone compounds having, for instance, alternating MMI and P═O or P═S linkages are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023, 5,489,677, 5,602,240 and 5,610,289, all of which are herein incorporated by reference. [0219]
  • Formacetal and thioformacetal linked oligonucleosides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564, herein incorporated by reference. [0220]
  • Ethylene oxide linked oligonucleosides are prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618, herein incorporated by reference. [0221]
  • Example 4
  • PNA Synthesis [0222]
  • Peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) are prepared in accordance with any of the various procedures referred to in Peptide Nucleic Acids (PNA): Synthesis, Properties and Potential Applications, [0223] Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry, 1996, 4, 5-23. They may also be prepared in accordance with U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082, 5,700,922, and 5,719,262, herein incorporated by reference.
  • Example 5
  • Synthesis of Chimeric Oligonucleotides [0224]
  • Chimeric oligonucleotides, oligonucleosides or mixed oligonucleotides/oligonucleosides of the invention can be of several different types. These include a first type wherein the “gap” segment of linked nucleosides is positioned between 5′ and 3′ “wing” segments of linked nucleosides and a second “open end” type wherein the “gap” segment is located at either the 3′ or the 5′ terminus of the oligomeric compound. Oligonucleotides of the first type are also known in the art as “gapmers” or gapped oligonucleotides. Oligonucleotides of the second type are also known in the art as “hemimers” or “wingmers”. [0225]
  • [2′-O-Me]--[2′-deoxy]--[2′-O-Me] Chimeric Phosphorothioate Oligonucleotides [0226]
  • Chimeric oligonucleotides having 2′-O-alkyl phosphorothioate and 2′-deoxy phosphorothioate oligo-nucleotide segments are synthesized using an Applied Biosystems automated DNA synthesizer Model 394, as above. Oligonucleotides are synthesized using the automated synthesizer and 2′-deoxy-5′-dimethoxytrityl-3′-O-phosphoramidite for the DNA portion and 5′-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-methyl-3′-O-phosphoramidite for 5′ and 3′ wings. The standard synthesis cycle is modified by incorporating coupling steps with increased reaction times for the 5′-dimethoxytrityl-2′-O-methyl-3′-O-phosphoramidite. The fully protected oligonucleotide is cleaved from the support and deprotected in concentrated ammonia (NH[0227] 4OH) 12-16 hr at 55° C. The deprotected oligo is then recovered by an appropriate method (precipitation, column chromatography, volume reduced in vacuo and analyzed spetrophotometrically for yeild and for purity by capillary electrophoresis and by mass spectrometry.
  • [2′-O-(2-Methoxyethyl)]--[2′-deoxy]--[2′-O-(Methoxyethyl)] Chimeric Phosphorothioate Oligonucleotides [0228]
  • [2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)]--[2′-deoxy]--[-2′-O-(methoxyethyl)] chimeric phosphorothioate oligonucleotides were prepared as per the procedure above for the 2′-O-methyl chimeric oligonucleotide, with the substitution of 2′-0-(methoxyethyl) amidites for the 2′-O-methyl amidites. [0229]
  • [2′-O-(2-Methoxyethyl)Phosphodiester]--[2′-deoxy Phosphorothioate]--[2′-O-(2-Methoxyethyl) Phosphodiester] Chimeric Oligonucleotides [0230]
  • [2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl phosphodiester]--[2′-deoxy phosphorothioate]--[2′-O-(methoxyethyl) phosphodiester] chimeric oligonucleotides are prepared as per the above procedure for the 2′-O-methyl chimeric oligonucleotide with the substitution of 2′-O-(methoxyethyl) amidites for the 2′-O-methyl amidites, oxidization with iodine to generate the phosphodiester internucleotide linkages within the wing portions of the chimeric structures and sulfurization utilizing 3,H-1,2 benzodithiole-3-one 1,1 dioxide (Beaucage Reagent) to generate the phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages for the center gap. [0231]
  • Other chimeric oligonucleotides, chimeric oligonucleosides and mixed chimeric oligonucleotides/oligonucleosides are synthesized according to U.S. Pat. No. 5,623,065, herein incorporated by reference. [0232]
  • Example 6
  • Oligonucleotide Isolation [0233]
  • After cleavage from the controlled pore glass solid support and deblocking in concentrated ammonium hydroxide at 55° C. for 12-16 hours, the oligonucleotides or oligonucleosides are recovered by precipitation out of 1 M NH[0234] 4OAc with >3 volumes ethanol. Synthesized oligonucleotides were analyzed by electrospray mass spectroscopy (molecular weight determination) and by capillary gel electrophoresis and judged to be at least 70% full length material. The relative amounts of phosphorothioate and phosphodiester linkages obtained in synthesis was determined by the ratio of correct molecular weight relative to the −16 amu product (+32+48). For some studies oligonucleotides were purified by HPLC, as described by Chiang et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1991, 266, 18162-18171. Results obtained with HPLC-purified material were similar to those obtained with non-HPLC purified material.
  • Example 7
  • Oligonucleotide Synthesis—96 Well Plate Format [0235]
  • Oligonucleotides were synthesized via solid phase P(III) phosphoramidite chemistry on an automated synthesizer capable of assembling 96 sequences simultaneously in a 96 well format. Phosphodiester internucleotide linkages were afforded by oxidation with aqueous iodine. Phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages were generated by sulfurization utilizing 3,H-1,2 benzodithiole-3-one 1,1 dioxide (Beaucage Reagent) in anhydrous acetonitrile. Standard base-protected beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites were purchased from commercial vendors (e.g. PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., or Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.). Non-standard nucleosides are synthesized as per known literature or patented methods. They are utilized as base protected beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites. [0236]
  • Oligonucleotides were cleaved from support and deprotected with concentrated NH[0237] 4OH at elevated temperature (55-60° C.) for 12-16 hours and the released product then dried in vacuo. The dried product was then re-suspended in sterile water to afford a master plate from which all analytical and test plate samples are then diluted utilizing robotic pipettors.
  • Example 8
  • Oligonucleotide Analysis—96 Well Plate Format [0238]
  • The concentration of oligonucleotide in each well was assessed by dilution of samples and UV absorption spectroscopy. The full-length integrity of the individual products was evaluated by capillary electrophoresis (CE) in either the 96 well format (Beckman P/ACE™ MDQ) or, for individually prepared samples, on a commercial CE apparatus (e.g., Beckman P/ACE™ 5000, ABI 270). Base and backbone composition was confirmed by mass analysis of the compounds utilizing electrospray-mass spectroscopy. All assay test plates were diluted from the master plate using single and multi-channel robotic pipettors. Plates were judged to be acceptable if at least 85% of the compounds on the plate were at least 85% full length. [0239]
  • Example 9
  • Cell Culture and Oligonucleotide Treatment [0240]
  • The effect of antisense compounds on target nucleic acid expression can be tested in any of a variety of cell types provided that the target nucleic acid is present at measurable levels. This can be routinely determined using, for example, PCR or Northern blot analysis. The following cell types are provided for illustrative purposes, but other cell types can be routinely used, provided that the target is expressed in the cell type chosen. This can be readily determined by methods routine in the art, for example Northern blot analysis, Ribonuclease protection assays, or RT-PCR. [0241]
  • T-24 Cells: [0242]
  • The human transitional cell bladder carcinoma cell line T-24 was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) (Manassas, Va.). T-24 cells were routinely cultured in complete McCoy's 5A basal media (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum ((Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.), penicillin 100 units per mL, and streptomycin 100 micrograms per mL (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.). Cells were routinely passaged by trypsinization and dilution when they reached 90% confluence. Cells were seeded into 96-well plates (Falcon-Primaria #3872) at a density of 7000 cells/well for use in RT-PCR analysis. [0243]
  • For Northern blotting or other analysis, cells may be seeded onto 100 mm or other standard tissue culture plates and treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of medium and oligonucleotide. [0244]
  • A549 Cells: [0245]
  • The human lung carcinoma cell line A549 was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) (Manassas, Va.). A549 cells were routinely cultured in DMEM basal media (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.), penicillin 100 units per mL, and streptomycin 100 micrograms per mL (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.). Cells were routinely passaged by trypsinization and dilution when they reached 90% confluence. [0246]
  • NHDF Cells: [0247]
  • Human neonatal dermal fibroblast (NHDF) were obtained from the Clonetics Corporation (Walkersville, Md.). NHDFs were routinely maintained in Fibroblast Growth Medium (Clonetics Corporation, Walkersville, MD) supplemented as recommended by the supplier. Cells were maintained for up to 10 passages as recommended by the supplier. [0248]
  • HEK Cells: [0249]
  • Human embryonic keratinocytes (HEK) were obtained from the Clonetics Corporation (Walkersville, Md.). HEKs were routinely maintained in Keratinocyte Growth Medium (Clonetics Corporation, Walkersville, Md.) formulated as recommended by the supplier. Cells were routinely maintained for up to 10 passages as recommended by the supplier. [0250]
  • THP-1 Cells: [0251]
  • The acute monocytic leukemia cell line, THP-1, was obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) (Manassas, Va.). The cells are routinely cultured at 37° C. in ATCC medium: RPMI 1640 medium with 2 mM L-glutamine adjusted to contain 1.5 g/L sodium bicarbonate, 4.5 g/L glucose, 10 mM HEPES and 1.0 mM sodium pyruvate and supplemented with 20% fetal bovine serum. [0252]
  • THP-1 cells are suspension cells and are therefore treated via electroporation. When the cell count reaches 2×10[0253] 7 cells/mL, 90 ul volumes of cell suspension are treated with 20 ul of 50 uM oligonucleotide (total concentration of 10 uM). This mixture is then transferred to a 1 mm gap cuvette. Then, 75 V is applied to the cuvette for 6 msec, after which, 800 ul growth media (RPMI) is added and mixed in the cuvette. 800 ul of this mixture is then transferred to a 24-well plate already containing 1 mL of growth media (RPMI) in each well (to give a total volume of 1.9 mL). After incubation overnight at 5% CO2, 800 ul of the mixture is transferred in duplicate from the 24-well plate to a 96-well deep well block. After centrifugation for 10 minutes at 2500 rpm, the media is decanted and cells are lysed in 150 ul of RLT buffer (Quiagen, Valencia, Calif.). RNA harvested from these mixtures is used in the standard RT-PCR assay.
  • Treatment with Antisense Compounds: [0254]
  • When cells reached 70% confluency, they were treated with oligonucleotide. For cells grown in 96-well plates, wells were washed once with 100 μL OPTI-MEM™-1 reduced-serum medium (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.) and then treated with 130 μL of OPTI-MEM™-1 containing 3.75 μg/mL LIPOFECTIN™ (Invitrogen Corporation, Carlsbad, Calif.) and the desired concentration of oligonucleotide. After 4-7 hours of treatment, the medium was replaced with fresh medium. Cells were harvested 16-24 hours after oligonucleotide treatment. [0255]
  • The concentration of oligonucleotide used varies from cell line to cell line. To determine the optimal oligonucleotide concentration for a particular cell line, the cells are treated with a positive control oligonucleotide at a range of concentrations. For human cells the positive control oligonucleotide is ISIS 13920, TCCGTCATCGCTCCTCAGGG, SEQ ID NO: 1, a 2′-O-methoxyethyl gapmer (2′-O-methoxyethyls shown in bold) with a phosphorothioate backbone which is targeted to human H-ras. For mouse or rat cells the positive control oligonucleotide is ISIS 15770, ATGCATTCTGCCCCCAAGGA, SEQ ID NO: 2, a 2′-O-methoxyethyl gapmer (2′-O-methoxyethyls shown in bold) with a phosphorothioate backbone which is targeted to both mouse and rat c-raf. The concentration of positive control oligonucleotide that results in 80% inhibition of c-Ha-ras (for ISIS 13920) or c-raf (for ISIS 15770) mRNA is then utilized as the screening concentration for-new oligonucleotides in subsequent experiments for that cell line. If 80% inhibition is not achieved, the lowest concentration of positive control oligonucleotide that results in 60% inhibition of H-ras or c-raf mRNA is then utilized as the oligonucleotide screening concentration in subsequent experiments for that cell line. If 60% inhibition is not achieved, that particular cell line is deemed as unsuitable for oligonucleotide transfection experiments. [0256]
  • Example 10
  • Analysis of Oligonucleotide Inhibition of Hydroxysteroid 11-Beta Dehydrogenase 1 Expression [0257]
  • Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression can be assayed in a variety of ways known in the art. For example, hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels can be quantitated by, e.g., Northern blot analysis, competitive polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or real-time PCR (RT-PCR). Real-time quantitative PCR is presently preferred. RNA analysis can be performed on total cellular RNA or poly(A)+ mRNA. The preferred method of RNA analysis of the present invention is the use of total cellular RNA as described in other examples herein. Methods of RNA isolation are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., [0258] Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 1, pp. 4.1.1-4.2.9 and 4.5.1-4.5.3, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1993. Northern blot analysis is routine in the art and is taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 1, pp. 4.2.1-4.2.9, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1996. Real-time quantitative (PCR) can be conveniently accomplished using the commercially available ABI PRISM™ 7700 Sequence Detection System, available from PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif. and used according to manufacturer's instructions.
  • Protein levels of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 can be quantitated in a variety of ways well known in the art, such as immunoprecipitation, Western blot analysis (immunoblotting), ELISA or fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS). Antibodies directed to hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 can be identified and obtained from a variety of sources, such as the MSRS catalog of antibodies (Aerie Corporation, Birmingham, Mich.), or can be prepared via conventional antibody generation methods. Methods for preparation of polyclonal antisera are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., [0259] Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 11.12.1-11.12.9, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997. Preparation of monoclonal antibodies is taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 11.4.1-11.11.5, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997.
  • Immunoprecipitation methods are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., [0260] Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 10.16.1-10.16.11, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998. Western blot (immunoblot) analysis is standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 10.8.1-10.8.21, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997. Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (ELISA) are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 11.2.1-11.2.22, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1991.
  • Example 11
  • Poly(A)+ mRNA Isolation [0261]
  • Poly(A)+ mRNA was isolated according to Miura et al., [0262] Clin. Chem., 1996, 42, 1758-1764. Other methods for poly(A)+ mRNA isolation are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 1, pp. 4.5.1-4.5.3, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1993. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium was removed from the cells and each well was washed with 200 μL cold PBS. 60 μL lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaCl, 0.5% NP-40, 20 mM vanadyl-ribonucleoside complex) was added to each well, the plate was gently agitated and then incubated at room temperature for five minutes. 55 μL of lysate was transferred to Oligo d(T) coated 96-well plates (AGCT Inc., Irvine Calif.). Plates were incubated for 60 minutes at room temperature, washed 3 times with 200 μL of wash buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.3 M NaCl). After the final wash, the plate was blotted on paper towels to remove excess wash buffer and then air-dried for 5 minutes. 60 μL of elution buffer (5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6), preheated to 70° C. was added to each well, the plate was incubated on a 90° C. hot plate for 5 minutes, and the eluate was then transferred to a fresh 96-well plate.
  • Cells grown on 100 mm or other standard plates may be treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of all solutions. [0263]
  • Example 12
  • Total RNA Isolation [0264]
  • Total RNA was isolated using an RNEASY 96™ kit and buffers purchased from Qiagen Inc. (Valencia, Calif.) following the manufacturer's recommended procedures. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium was removed from the cells and each well was washed with 200 μL cold PBS. 150 μL Buffer RLT was added to each well and the plate vigorously agitated for 20 seconds. 150 μL of 70% ethanol was then added to each well and the contents mixed by pipetting three times up and down. The samples were then transferred to the RNEASY 96™ well plate attached to a QIAVAC™ manifold fitted with a waste collection tray and attached to a vacuum source. Vacuum was applied for 1 minute. 500 μL of Buffer RW1 was added to each well of the RNEASY 96™ plate and incubated for 15 minutes and the vacuum was again applied for 1 minute. An additional 500 μL of Buffer RW1 was added to each well of the RNEASY 96™ plate and the vacuum was applied for 2 minutes. 1 mL of Buffer RPE was then added to each well of the RNEASY 96™ plate and the vacuum applied for a period of 90 seconds. The Buffer RPE wash was then repeated and the vacuum was applied for an additional 3 minutes. The plate was then removed from the QIAVAC™ manifold and blotted dry on paper towels. The plate was then re-attached to the QIAVAC™ manifold fitted with a collection tube rack containing 1.2 mL collection tubes. RNA was then eluted by pipetting 170 μL water into each well, incubating 1 minute, and then applying the vacuum for 3 minutes. [0265]
  • The repetitive pipetting and elution steps may be automated using a QIAGEN Bio-Robot 9604 (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia Calif.). Essentially, after lysing of the cells on the culture plate, the plate is transferred to the robot deck where the pipetting, DNase treatment and elution steps are carried out. [0266]
  • Example 13
  • Real-Time Quantitative PCR Analysis of Hydroxysteroid 11-beta Dehydrogenase 1 mRNA Levels [0267]
  • Quantitation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels was determined by real-time quantitative PCR using the ABI PRISM™ 7700 Sequence Detection System (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) according to manufacturer's instructions. This is a closed-tube, non-gel-based, fluorescence detection system which allows high-throughput quantitation of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) products in real-time. As opposed to standard PCR, in which amplification products are quantitated after the PCR is completed, products in real-time quantitative PCR are quantitated as they accumulate. This is accomplished by including in the PCR reaction an oligonucleotide probe that anneals specifically between the forward and reverse PCR primers, and contains two fluorescent dyes. A reporter dye (e.g., FAM, obtained from either Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, CA or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa) is attached to the 5′ end of the probe and a quencher dye (e.g., TAMRA, obtained from either Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa) is attached to the 3′ end of the probe. When the probe and dyes are intact, reporter dye emission is quenched by the proximity of the 3′ quencher dye. During amplification, annealing of the probe to the target sequence creates a substrate that can be cleaved by the 5′-exonuclease activity of Taq polymerase. During the extension phase of the PCR amplification cycle, cleavage of the probe by Taq polymerase releases the reporter dye from the remainder of the probe (and hence from the quencher moiety) and a sequence-specific fluorescent signal is generated. With each cycle, additional reporter dye molecules are cleaved from their respective probes, and the fluorescence intensity is monitored at regular intervals by laser optics built into the ABI PRISM™ 7700 Sequence Detection System. In each assay, a series of parallel reactions containing serial dilutions of mRNA from untreated control samples generates a standard curve that is used to quantitate the percent inhibition after antisense oligonucleotide treatment of test samples. [0268]
  • Prior to quantitative PCR analysis, primer-probe sets specific to the target gene being measured are evaluated for their ability to be “multiplexed” with a GAPDH amplification reaction. In multiplexing, both the target gene and the internal standard gene GAPDH are amplified concurrently in a single sample. In this analysis, mRNA isolated from untreated cells is serially diluted. Each dilution is amplified in the presence of primer-probe sets specific for GAPDH only, target gene only (“single-plexing”), or both (multiplexing). Following PCR amplification, standard curves of GAPDH and target mRNA signal as a function of dilution are generated from both the single-plexed and multiplexed samples. If both the slope and correlation coefficient of the GAPDH and target signals generated from the multiplexed samples fall within 10% of their corresponding values generated from the single-plexed samples, the primer-probe set specific for that target is deemed multiplexable. Other methods of PCR are also known in the art. [0269]
  • PCR reagents were obtained from Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif. RT-PCR reactions were carried out by adding 20 μL PCR cocktail (2.5×PCR buffer (—MgCl[0270] 2), 6.6 mM MgCl2, 375 μM each of DATP, dCTP, dCTP and dGTP, 375 nM each of forward primer and reverse primer, 125 nM of probe, 4 Units RNAse inhibitor, 1.25 Units PLATINUM® Taq, 5 Units MuLV reverse transcriptase, and 2.5×ROX dye) to 96 well plates containing 30 μL total RNA solution. The RT reaction was carried out by incubation for 30 minutes at 48° C. Following a 10 minute incubation at 95° C. to activate the PLATINUM® Taq, 40 cycles of a two-step PCR protocol were carried out: 95° C. for 15 seconds (denaturation) followed by 60° C. for 1.5 minutes (annealing/extension).
  • Gene target quantities obtained by real time RT-PCR are normalized using either the expression level of GAPDH, a gene whose expression is constant, or by quantifying total RNA using RiboGreen™ (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.). GAPDH expression is quantified by real time RT-PCR, by being run simultaneously with the target, multiplexing, or separately. Total RNA is quantified using RiboGreen™ RNA quantification reagent from Molecular Probes. Methods of RNA quantification by RiboGreenTM are taught in Jones, L. J., et al, Analytical Biochemistry, 1998, 265, 368-374. [0271]
  • In this assay, 170 μL of RiboGreen™ working reagent (RiboGreen™ reagent diluted 1:350 in 10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 7.5) is pipetted into a 96-well plate containing 30 μL purified, cellular RNA. The plate is read in a CytoFluor 4000 (PE Applied Biosystems) with excitation at 480 nm and emission at 520 nm. [0272]
  • Probes and primers to human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 were designed to hybridize to a human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 sequence, using published sequence information (GenBank accession number NM[0273] 005525.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO:3). For human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 the PCR primers were: forward primer: GTTTCTGGGATAGTCCATATGCAA (SEQ ID NO: 4) reverse primer: AGCTCCCCCTTTGATGATCTC (SEQ ID NO: 5) and the PCR probe was: FAM-CAGCTCCAAAGGAGGAATGTGCCCT-TAMRA (SEQ ID NO: 6) where FAM (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye. For human GAPDH the PCR primers were:
  • forward primer: GAAGGTGAAGGTCGGAGTC(SEQ ID NO:7) [0274]
  • reverse primer: GAAGATGGTGATGGGATTTC (SEQ ID NO:8) and the PCR probe was: 5′ JOE-CAAGCTTCCCGTTCTCAGCC-TAMRA 3′ (SEQ ID NO: 9) where JOE (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye. [0275]
  • Probes and primers to mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 were designed to hybridize to a mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 sequence, using published sequence information (GenBank accession number X83202.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO:10). For mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 the PCR primers were: forward primer: GGCGGACTGGACATGCTT (SEQ ID NO:11) reverse primer: GAGTGGATGTCGTCATGGAAGA (SEQ ID NO: 12) and the PCR probe was: FAM-TTCTAAACCACATCACTCAGACCTCGCTGTC-TAMRA (SEQ ID NO: 13) where FAM (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye. For mouse GAPDH the PCR primers were: [0276]
  • forward primer: GGCAAATTCAACGGCACAGT (SEQ ID NO:14) [0277]
  • reverse primer: GGGTCTCGCTCCTGGAAGAT (SEQ ID NO:15) and the PCR probe was: 5′ JOE-AAGGCCGAGAATGGGAAGCTTGTCATC-TAMRA 3′ (SEQ ID NO: 16) where JOE (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the fluorescent reporter dye) and TAMRA (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) is the quencher dye. [0278]
  • Example 14
  • Northern Blot Analysis of Hydroxysteroid 11-beta Dehydrogenase 1 mRNA Levels [0279]
  • Eighteen hours after antisense treatment, cell monolayers were washed twice with cold PBS and lysed in 1 mL RNAZOLTM (TEL-TEST “B” Inc., Friendswood, Tex.). Total RNA was prepared following manufacturer's recommended protocols. Twenty micrograms of total RNA was fractionated by electrophoresis through 1.2% agarose gels containing 1.1% formaldehyde using a MOPS buffer system (AMRESCO, Inc. Solon, Ohio). RNA was transferred from the gel to HYBOND™-N+ nylon membranes (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Piscataway, N.J.) by overnight capillary transfer using a Northern/Southern Transfer buffer system (TEL-TEST “B” Inc., Friendswood, Tex.). RNA transfer was confirmed by UV visualization. Membranes were fixed by UV cross-linking using a STRATALINKER™ UV Crosslinker 2400 (Stratagene, Inc, La Jolla, Calif.) and then probed using QUICKHYB™ hybridization solution (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) using manufacturer's recommendations for stringent conditions. [0280]
  • To detect human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, a human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 specific probe was prepared by PCR using the forward primer GTTTCTGGGATAGTCCATATGCAA (SEQ ID NO: 4) and the reverse primer AGCTCCCCCTTTGATGATCTC (SEQ ID NO: 5). To normalize for variations in loading and transfer efficiency membranes were stripped and probed for human glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GAPDH) RNA (Clontech, Palo Alto, Calif.). [0281]
  • To detect mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, a mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 specific probe was prepared by PCR using the forward primer GGCGGACTGGACATGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 11) and the reverse primer GAGTGGATGTCGTCATGGAAGA (SEQ ID NO: 12). To normalize for variations in loading and transfer efficiency membranes were stripped and probed for mouse glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GAPDH) RNA (Clontech, Palo Alto, Calif.). [0282]
  • Hybridized membranes were visualized and quantitated using a PHOSPHORIMAGER™ and IMAGEQUANT™ Software V3.3 (Molecular Dynamics, Sunnyvale, Calif.). Data was normalized to GAPDH levels in untreated controls. [0283]
  • Example 15
  • Antisense Inhibition of Human Hydroxysteroid 11-beta Dehydrogenase 1 Expression by Chimeric Phosphorothioate Oligonucleotides having 2′-MOE Wings and a Deoxy Gap [0284]
  • In accordance with the present invention, a series of oligonucleotides were designed to target different regions of the human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 RNA, using published sequences (GenBank accession number NM[0285] 005525.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO: 3). The oligonucleotides are shown in Table 1. “Target site” indicates the first (5′-most) nucleotide number on the particular target sequence to which the oligonucleotide binds. All compounds in Table 1 are chimeric oligonucleotides (“gapmers”) 20 nucleotides in length, composed of a central “gap” region consisting of ten 2′-deoxynucleotides, which is flanked on both sides (5′ and 3′ directions) by five-nucleotide “wings”. The wings are composed of 2′-methoxyethyl (2′-MOE)nucleotides. The internucleoside (backbone) linkages are phosphorothioate (P═S) throughout the oligonucleotide. All cytidine residues are 5-methylcytidines. The compounds were analyzed for their effect on human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels by quantitative real-time PCR as described in other examples herein. Data are averages from two experiments. If present, “N.D.” indicates “no data”.
    TABLE 1
    Inhibition of human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1
    mRNA levels by chimeric phosphorothioate oligonucleotides
    having 2′-MOE wings and a deoxy gap
    TARGET
    SEQ ID TARGET SEQ ID
    ISIS # REGION NO SITE SEQUENCE % INHIB NO
    145986 coding 3 141 agaatagtagtagtaggcca 45 17
    145990 coding 3 194 gtgacaatcactttctttcc 83 18
    146007 coding 3 555 ctgcttcagcatgggcaagg 39 19
    146008 coding 3 561 attgctctgcttcagcatgg 51 20
    146020 coding 3 737 tctgtgtctatgaggccaag 45 21
    146021 coding 3 743 gctgtttctgtgtctatgag 36 22
    146024 coding 3 818 cctttgatgatctccagggc 90 23
    242358 5′ UTR 3 5 ctaagcaggcagcagcctct 71 24
    242361 5′ UTR 3 25 acagagctttctacaacctc 63 25
    242364 start 3 86 ataaaagccatccgacaggg 49 26
    codon
    242367 coding 3 175 cttggagcatctctggtctg 60 27
    242370 coding 3 300 taccaccttctgtagagttt 64 28
    242372 coding 3 321 tccaagctccaggcagtggg 49 29
    242374 coding 3 350 gtgccagcaatgtagtgtgc 76 30
    242376 coding 3 382 caaattgctctgcgaaggtc 77 31
    242378 coding 3 411 tcctcccatgagctttcctg 57 32
    242380 coding 3 428 agaatgagcatgtctagtcc 58 33
    242382 coding 3 484 gcacatggtgaatatcatca 89 34
    242384 coding 3 520 ccacgtaactgaggaagttg 49 35
    242386 coding 3 573 aacaatgcttccattgctct 40 36
    242388 coding 3 597 tttcccagccagagaggaga 44 37
    242390 coding 3 647 tccaaagcaaacttgcttgc 43 38
    242392 coding 3 714 acagagagtgattgatacat 44 39
    242394 coding 3 771 atggactatcccagaaactg 86 40
    242396 coding 3 790 cctttggagctgcttgcata 97 41
    242398 coding 3 822 tccccctttgatgatctcca 70 42
    242400 coding 3 838 cttcttggcgcagagctccc 58 43
    242402 coding 3 872 agagtggtccagagtgagct 54 44
    242404 coding 3 881 ctgatcagaagagtggtcca 57 45
    242406 coding 3 918 tgagtagagaaattccagga 58 46
    242408 3′ UTR 3 979 agcatgcccagccctcaggg 64 47
    242410 3′ UTR 3 992 cccaaaatccctcagcatgc 87 48
    242412 3′ UTR 3 1043 gggaagatgtcttcatagat 57 49
    242414 3′ UTR 3 1080 gtgtgacccatgacttgcat 77 50
    242416 3′ UTR 3 1092 tccatttgtcaggtgtgacc 89 51
    242418 3′ UTR 3 1125 catttccattttgcaaatgt 65 52
    242422 3′ UTR 3 1188 cctatgtttactaacaattt 51 53
    242424 3′ UTR 3 1307 tagctaccagttatgaattt 42 54
    242426 3′ UTR 3 1334 agaaccatcctgaataagct 46 55
    242428 3′ UTR 3 1353 tgtacagtttatggtttaaa 19 56
  • As shown in Table 1, SEQ ID NOs 18, 20, 23, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52 and 53 demonstrated at least 51% inhibition of human hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression in this assay and are therefore preferred. The target sites to which these preferred sequences are complementary are herein referred to as “active sites” and are therefore preferred sites for targeting by compounds of the present invention. [0286]
  • Example 16
  • Antisense Inhibition of Mouse Hydroxysteroid 11-beta Dehydrogenase 1 Expression by Chimeric Phosphorothioate Oligonucleotides having 2′-MOE Wings and a Deoxy Gap. [0287]
  • In accordance with the present invention, a second series of oligonucleotides were designed to target different regions of the mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 RNA, using a published sequence (GenBank accession number X83202.1, incorporated herein as SEQ ID NO: 10). The oligonucleotides are shown in Table 2. “Target site” indicates the first (5′-most) nucleotide number on the particular target sequence to which the oligonucleotide binds. All compounds in Table 2 are chimeric oligonucleotides (“gapmers”) 20 nucleotides in length, composed of a central “gap” region consisting of ten 2′-deoxynucleotides, which is flanked on both sides (5′ and 3′ directions) by five-nucleotide “wings”. The wings are composed of 2′-methoxyethyl (2′-MOE)nucleotides. The internucleoside (backbone) linkages are phosphorothioate (P═S) throughout the oligonucleotide. All cytidine residues are 5-methylcytidines. The compounds were analyzed for their effect on mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 mRNA levels by quantitative real-time PCR as described in other examples herein. Data are averages from two experiments. If present, “N.D.” indicates “no data”. [0288]
    TABLE 2
    Inhibition of mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1
    mRNA levels by chimeric phosphorothioate oligonucleotides
    having 2′-MOE wings and a deoxy gap
    TARGET
    SEQ ID TARGET SEQ ID
    ISIS # REGION NO SITE SEQUENCE % INHIB NO
    145979 5′ UTR 10 2 ctctatccttctgtctcatc 0 57
    145980 5′ UTR 10 81 gaggcttcagataagtgcgg 0 58
    145981 5′ UTR 10 101 ggacctggctcaggcccctt 19 59
    145982 start 10 110 atcaaacagggacctggctc 38 60
    codon
    145983 start 10 119 ataactgccatcaaacaggg 25 61
    codon
    145984 coding 10 150 gagcaccaggatcgggagga 21 62
    145985 coding 10 157 ccagggagagcaccaggatc 8 63
    145986 coding 10 174 agaatagtagtagtaggcca 0 17
    145987 coding 10 183 ttcatttgtagaatagtagt 0 64
    145988 coding 10 193 gtctgaactcttcatttgta 0 65
    145989 coding 10 203 agcatttctggtctgaactc 21 66
    145990 coding 10 227 gtgacaatcactttctttcc 30 18
    145991 coding 10 234 ggccccagtgacaatcactt 0 67
    145992 coding 10 240 tttgctggccccagtgacaa 28 68
    145993 coding 10 252 tcttccaatccctttgctgg 37 69
    145994 coding 10 270 cagatgatatgccatttctc 5 70
    145995 coding 10 280 ccatttttgacagatgatat 0 71
    145996 coding 10 290 acatgggctcccatttttga 11 72
    145997 coding 10 300 agtcaataccacatgggctc 17 73
    145998 coding 10 350 agttcaaggcagcgagacac 19 74
    145999 coding 10 360 ggctgctccgagttcaaggc 31 75
    146000 coding 10 370 agtgagcagaggctgctccg 27 76
    146001 coding 10 417 aataaattgctccgcaaatg 12 77
    146002 coding 10 440 cccatgagctttcccgcctt 0 78
    146003 coding 10 483 cgaggtctgagtgatgtggt 94 79
    146004 coding 10 514 cagagtggatgtcgtcatgg 46 80
    146005 coding 10 536 ttgacctccatgactcttcg 21 81
    146006 coding 10 544 tgaggaagttgacctccatg 39 82
    146007 coding 10 588 ctgcttcagcatgggcaagg 29 19
    146008 coding 10 594 attgctctgcttcagcatgg 32 20
    146009 coding 10 600 gctgccattgctctgcttca 9 83
    146010 coding 10 605 gcaatgctgccattgctctg 26 84
    146011 coding 10 611 atgacggcaatgctgccatt 16 85
    146012 coding 10 645 cataggctgggtcattttcc 11 86
    146013 coding 10 672 aaacttgcttgcagagtagg 25 87
    146014 coding 10 682 catccagagcaaacttgctt 49 88
    146015 coding 10 692 gaaaagaacccatccagagc 0 89
    146016 coding 10 702 tctaatggtggaaaagaacc 3 90
    146017 coding 10 724 ccttggttatgtagagttct 17 91
    146018 coding 10 737 atggacacgttgaccttggt 52 92
    146019 coding 10 747 acagagagtgatggacacgt 13 93
    146020 coding 10 770 tctgtgtctatgaggccaag 0 21
    146021 coding 10 776 gctgtttctgtgtctatgag 71 22
    146022 coding 10 803 tcaattatcccagagatttc 17 94
    146023 coding 10 843 gatctccagggcgcactcct 35 95
    146024 coding 10 851 cctttgatgatctccagggc 1 23
    146025 coding 10 857 gctgtgcctttgatgatctc 43 96
    146026 coding 10 867 tttgcgtagagctgtgcctt 36 97
    146027 coding 10 894 aggcaatttgtcatagtaca 16 98
    146028 coding 10 913 caagcaggattggagtcaaa 22 99
    146029 coding 10 935 atgatcttccttcctgggtt 27 100
    146030 coding 10 941 aattccatgatcttccttcc 36 101
    146031 coding 10 972 catgtccttattataatatc 11 102
    146032 stop 10 996 caggagttcctagttactta 15 103
    codon
    146033 3′ UTR 10 1018 tctaagaccactcaccaggg 81 104
    146034 3′ UTR 10 1047 gggcttactgaagtatgagg 10 105
    146035 3′ UTR 10 1073 tctctggaaagatacttttg 66 106
    146036 3′ UTR 10 1082 atttgtgtatctctggaaag 40 107
    146037 3′ UTR 10 1092 gtaccccaaaatttgtgtat 64 108
    146038 3′ UTR 10 1107 ttctcatgatgaggtgtacc 84 109
    146039 3′ UTR 10 1119 tgttgcaagaatttctcatg 61 110
    146040 3′ UTR 10 1129 actgtgcaagtgttgcaaga 45 111
    146041 3′ UTR 10 1138 tacattttcactgtgcaagt 51 112
    146042 3′ UTR 10 1154 tgacatttattacaattaca 40 113
    146043 3′ UTR 10 1160 ggtttgtgacatttattaca 71 114
    146044 3′ UTR 10 1166 caaagtggtttgtgacattt 10 115
    146045 3′ UTR 10 1187 tcaagttcacaactgcaggc 71 116
    146046 3′ UTR 10 1198 catagttacaatcaagttca 28 117
    146047 3′ UTR 10 1220 acaaccactatgtgtttata 26 118
    146048 3′ UTR 10 1227 agccgatacaaccactatgt 74 119
    146049 3′ UTR 10 1248 gtttcattcagtgtgaggta 44 120
    146050 3′ UTR 10 1296 gaagttgatattacctttat 44 121
    146051 3′ UTR 10 1301 tttacgaagttgatattacc 0 122
  • As shown in Table 2, SEQ ID NOs 22, 79, 80, 88, 92, 96, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 116, 119, 120 and 121 demonstrated at least 40% inhibition of mouse hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression in this experiment and are therefore preferred. The target sites to which these preferred sequences are complementary are herein referred to as “active sites” and are therefore preferred sites for targeting by compounds of the present invention. [0289]
  • Example 17
  • Western Blot Analysis of Hydroxysteroid 11-beta Dehydrogenase [0290]
  • 1 Protein Levels [0291]
  • Western blot analysis (immunoblot analysis) is carried out using standard methods. Cells are harvested 16-20 h after oligonucleotide treatment, washed once with PBS, suspended in Laemmli buffer (100 ul/well), boiled for 5 minutes and loaded on a 16% SDS-PAGE gel. Gels are run for 1.5 hours at 150 V, and transferred to membrane for western blotting. Appropriate primary antibody directed to hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is used, with a radiolabelled or fluorescently labeled secondary antibody directed against the primary antibody species. Bands are visualized using a PHOSPHORIMAGE™ (Molecular Dynamics, Sunnyvale Calif.). [0292]
  • 1 122 1 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 1 tccgtcatcg ctcctcaggg 20 2 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 2 atgcattctg cccccaagga 20 3 1375 DNA Homo sapiens CDS (95)...(973) 3 attcagaggc tgctgcctgc ttaggaggtt gtagaaagct ctgtaggttc tctctgtgtg 60 tcctacagga gtcttcaggc cagctccctg tcgg atg gct ttt atg aaa aaa tat 115 Met Ala Phe Met Lys Lys Tyr 1 5 ctc ctc ccc att ctg ggg ctc ttc atg gcc tac tac tac tat tct gca 163 Leu Leu Pro Ile Leu Gly Leu Phe Met Ala Tyr Tyr Tyr Tyr Ser Ala 10 15 20 aac gag gaa ttc aga cca gag atg ctc caa gga aag aaa gtg att gtc 211 Asn Glu Glu Phe Arg Pro Glu Met Leu Gln Gly Lys Lys Val Ile Val 25 30 35 aca ggg gcc agc aaa ggg atc gga aga gag atg gct tat cat ctg gcg 259 Thr Gly Ala Ser Lys Gly Ile Gly Arg Glu Met Ala Tyr His Leu Ala 40 45 50 55 aag atg gga gcc cat gtg gtg gtg aca gcg agg tca aaa gaa act cta 307 Lys Met Gly Ala His Val Val Val Thr Ala Arg Ser Lys Glu Thr Leu 60 65 70 cag aag gtg gta tcc cac tgc ctg gag ctt gga gca gcc tca gca cac 355 Gln Lys Val Val Ser His Cys Leu Glu Leu Gly Ala Ala Ser Ala His 75 80 85 tac att gct ggc acc atg gaa gac atg acc ttc gca gag caa ttt gtt 403 Tyr Ile Ala Gly Thr Met Glu Asp Met Thr Phe Ala Glu Gln Phe Val 90 95 100 gcc caa gca gga aag ctc atg gga gga cta gac atg ctc att ctc aac 451 Ala Gln Ala Gly Lys Leu Met Gly Gly Leu Asp Met Leu Ile Leu Asn 105 110 115 cac atc acc aac act tct ttg aat ctt ttt cat gat gat att cac cat 499 His Ile Thr Asn Thr Ser Leu Asn Leu Phe His Asp Asp Ile His His 120 125 130 135 gtg cgc aaa agc atg gaa gtc aac ttc ctc agt tac gtg gtc ctg act 547 Val Arg Lys Ser Met Glu Val Asn Phe Leu Ser Tyr Val Val Leu Thr 140 145 150 gta gct gcc ttg ccc atg ctg aag cag agc aat gga agc att gtt gtc 595 Val Ala Ala Leu Pro Met Leu Lys Gln Ser Asn Gly Ser Ile Val Val 155 160 165 gtc tcc tct ctg gct ggg aaa gtg gct tat cca atg gtt gct gcc tat 643 Val Ser Ser Leu Ala Gly Lys Val Ala Tyr Pro Met Val Ala Ala Tyr 170 175 180 tct gca agc aag ttt gct ttg gat ggg ttc ttc tcc tcc atc aga aag 691 Ser Ala Ser Lys Phe Ala Leu Asp Gly Phe Phe Ser Ser Ile Arg Lys 185 190 195 gaa tat tca gtg tcc agg gtc aat gta tca atc act ctc tgt gtt ctt 739 Glu Tyr Ser Val Ser Arg Val Asn Val Ser Ile Thr Leu Cys Val Leu 200 205 210 215 ggc ctc ata gac aca gaa aca gcc atg aag gca gtt tct ggg ata gtc 787 Gly Leu Ile Asp Thr Glu Thr Ala Met Lys Ala Val Ser Gly Ile Val 220 225 230 cat atg caa gca gct cca aag gag gaa tgt gcc ctg gag atc atc aaa 835 His Met Gln Ala Ala Pro Lys Glu Glu Cys Ala Leu Glu Ile Ile Lys 235 240 245 ggg gga gct ctg cgc caa gaa gaa gtg tat tat gac agc tca ctc tgg 883 Gly Gly Ala Leu Arg Gln Glu Glu Val Tyr Tyr Asp Ser Ser Leu Trp 250 255 260 acc act ctt ctg atc aga aat cca tgc agg aag atc ctg gaa ttt ctc 931 Thr Thr Leu Leu Ile Arg Asn Pro Cys Arg Lys Ile Leu Glu Phe Leu 265 270 275 tac tca acg agc tat aat atg gac aga ttc ata aac aag tag 973 Tyr Ser Thr Ser Tyr Asn Met Asp Arg Phe Ile Asn Lys * 280 285 290 gaactccctg agggctgggc atgctgaggg attttgggac tgttctgtct catgtttatc 1033 tgagctctta tctatgaaga catcttccca gagtgtcccc agagacatgc aagtcatggg 1093 tcacacctga caaatggaag gagttcctct aacatttgca aaatggaaat gtaataataa 1153 tgaatgtcat gcaccgctgc agccagcagt tgtaaaattg ttagtaaaca taggtataat 1213 taccagatag ttatattaaa tttatatctt atatataata atatgtgatg attaatacaa 1273 tattaattat aataaaggtc acataaactt tataaattca taactggtag ctataacttg 1333 agcttattca ggatggttct ttaaaccata aactgtacaa tg 1375 4 24 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 4 gtttctggga tagtccatat gcaa 24 5 21 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 5 agctccccct ttgatgatct c 21 6 25 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Probe 6 cagctccaaa ggaggaatgt gccct 25 7 19 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 7 gaaggtgaag gtcggagtc 19 8 20 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 8 gaagatggtg atgggatttc 20 9 20 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Probe 9 caagcttccc gttctcagcc 20 10 1350 DNA Mus musculus CDS (128)...(1006) 10 ggatgagaca gaaggataga gaggaggaga gagagagaga gaagagaagc aaccagaaat 60 aggcagccaa taaaaaggag ccgcacttat ctgaagcctc aaggggcctg agccaggtcc 120 ctgtttg atg gca gtt atg aaa aat tac ctc ctc ccg atc ctg gtg ctc 169 Met Ala Val Met Lys Asn Tyr Leu Leu Pro Ile Leu Val Leu 1 5 10 tcc ctg gcc tac tac tac tat tct aca aat gaa gag ttc aga cca gaa 217 Ser Leu Ala Tyr Tyr Tyr Tyr Ser Thr Asn Glu Glu Phe Arg Pro Glu 15 20 25 30 atg ctc cag gga aag aaa gtg att gtc act ggg gcc agc aaa ggg att 265 Met Leu Gln Gly Lys Lys Val Ile Val Thr Gly Ala Ser Lys Gly Ile 35 40 45 gga aga gaa atg gca tat cat ctg tca aaa atg gga gcc cat gtg gta 313 Gly Arg Glu Met Ala Tyr His Leu Ser Lys Met Gly Ala His Val Val 50 55 60 ttg act gcc agg tcg gag gaa ggt ctc cag aag gta gtg tct cgc tgc 361 Leu Thr Ala Arg Ser Glu Glu Gly Leu Gln Lys Val Val Ser Arg Cys 65 70 75 ctt gaa ctc gga gca gcc tct gct cac tac att gct ggc act atg gaa 409 Leu Glu Leu Gly Ala Ala Ser Ala His Tyr Ile Ala Gly Thr Met Glu 80 85 90 gac atg aca ttt gcg gag caa ttt att gtc aag gcg gga aag ctc atg 457 Asp Met Thr Phe Ala Glu Gln Phe Ile Val Lys Ala Gly Lys Leu Met 95 100 105 110 ggc gga ctg gac atg ctt att cta aac cac atc act cag acc tcg ctg 505 Gly Gly Leu Asp Met Leu Ile Leu Asn His Ile Thr Gln Thr Ser Leu 115 120 125 tct ctc ttc cat gac gac atc cac tct gtg cga aga gtc atg gag gtc 553 Ser Leu Phe His Asp Asp Ile His Ser Val Arg Arg Val Met Glu Val 130 135 140 aac ttc ctc agc tac gtg gtc atg agc aca gcc gcc ttg ccc atg ctg 601 Asn Phe Leu Ser Tyr Val Val Met Ser Thr Ala Ala Leu Pro Met Leu 145 150 155 aag cag agc aat ggc agc att gcc gtc atc tcc tcc ttg gct ggg aaa 649 Lys Gln Ser Asn Gly Ser Ile Ala Val Ile Ser Ser Leu Ala Gly Lys 160 165 170 atg acc cag cct atg att gct ccc tac tct gca agc aag ttt gct ctg 697 Met Thr Gln Pro Met Ile Ala Pro Tyr Ser Ala Ser Lys Phe Ala Leu 175 180 185 190 gat ggg ttc ttt tcc acc att aga aca gaa ctc tac ata acc aag gtc 745 Asp Gly Phe Phe Ser Thr Ile Arg Thr Glu Leu Tyr Ile Thr Lys Val 195 200 205 aac gtg tcc atc act ctc tgt gtc ctt ggc ctc ata gac aca gaa aca 793 Asn Val Ser Ile Thr Leu Cys Val Leu Gly Leu Ile Asp Thr Glu Thr 210 215 220 gct atg aag gaa atc tct ggg ata att gac gcc cta gct tct ccc aag 841 Ala Met Lys Glu Ile Ser Gly Ile Ile Asp Ala Leu Ala Ser Pro Lys 225 230 235 gag gag tgc gcc ctg gag atc atc aaa ggc aca gct cta cgc aaa agc 889 Glu Glu Cys Ala Leu Glu Ile Ile Lys Gly Thr Ala Leu Arg Lys Ser 240 245 250 gag gtg tac tat gac aaa ttg cct ttg act cca atc ctg ctt ggg aac 937 Glu Val Tyr Tyr Asp Lys Leu Pro Leu Thr Pro Ile Leu Leu Gly Asn 255 260 265 270 cca gga agg aag atc atg gaa ttt ttt tca tta cga tat tat aat aag 985 Pro Gly Arg Lys Ile Met Glu Phe Phe Ser Leu Arg Tyr Tyr Asn Lys 275 280 285 gac atg ttt gta agt aac tag gaactcctga gccctggtga gtggtcttag 1036 Asp Met Phe Val Ser Asn * 290 aacagtcctg cctcatactt cagtaagccc tacccacaaa agtatctttc cagagataca 1096 caaattttgg ggtacacctc atcatgagaa attcttgcaa cacttgcaca gtgaaaatgt 1156 aattgtaata aatgtcacaa accactttgg gcctgcagtt gtgaacttga ttgtaactat 1216 ggatataaac acatagtggt tgtatcggct ttacctcaca ctgaatgaaa caatgataac 1276 taatgtaaca ttaaatataa taaaggtaat atcaacttcg taaatgcaaa aaaaaaaaaa 1336 aaaaaaaaaa aaaa 1350 11 18 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 11 ggcggactgg acatgctt 18 12 22 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 12 gagtggatgt cgtcatggaa ga 22 13 31 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Probe 13 ttctaaacca catcactcag acctcgctgt c 31 14 20 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 14 ggcaaattca acggcacagt 20 15 20 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Primer 15 gggtctcgct cctggaagat 20 16 27 DNA Artificial Sequence PCR Probe 16 aaggccgaga atgggaagct tgtcatc 27 17 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 17 agaatagtag tagtaggcca 20 18 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 18 gtgacaatca ctttctttcc 20 19 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 19 ctgcttcagc atgggcaagg 20 20 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 20 attgctctgc ttcagcatgg 20 21 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 21 tctgtgtcta tgaggccaag 20 22 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 22 gctgtttctg tgtctatgag 20 23 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 23 cctttgatga tctccagggc 20 24 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 24 ctaagcaggc agcagcctct 20 25 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 25 acagagcttt ctacaacctc 20 26 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 26 ataaaagcca tccgacaggg 20 27 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 27 cttggagcat ctctggtctg 20 28 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 28 taccaccttc tgtagagttt 20 29 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 29 tccaagctcc aggcagtggg 20 30 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 30 gtgccagcaa tgtagtgtgc 20 31 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 31 caaattgctc tgcgaaggtc 20 32 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 32 tcctcccatg agctttcctg 20 33 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 33 agaatgagca tgtctagtcc 20 34 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 34 gcacatggtg aatatcatca 20 35 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 35 ccacgtaact gaggaagttg 20 36 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 36 aacaatgctt ccattgctct 20 37 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 37 tttcccagcc agagaggaga 20 38 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 38 tccaaagcaa acttgcttgc 20 39 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 39 acagagagtg attgatacat 20 40 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 40 atggactatc ccagaaactg 20 41 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 41 cctttggagc tgcttgcata 20 42 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 42 tccccctttg atgatctcca 20 43 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 43 cttcttggcg cagagctccc 20 44 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 44 agagtggtcc agagtgagct 20 45 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 45 ctgatcagaa gagtggtcca 20 46 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 46 tgagtagaga aattccagga 20 47 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 47 agcatgccca gccctcaggg 20 48 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 48 cccaaaatcc ctcagcatgc 20 49 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 49 gggaagatgt cttcatagat 20 50 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 50 gtgtgaccca tgacttgcat 20 51 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 51 tccatttgtc aggtgtgacc 20 52 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 52 catttccatt ttgcaaatgt 20 53 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 53 cctatgttta ctaacaattt 20 54 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 54 tagctaccag ttatgaattt 20 55 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 55 agaaccatcc tgaataagct 20 56 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 56 tgtacagttt atggtttaaa 20 57 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 57 ctctatcctt ctgtctcatc 20 58 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 58 gaggcttcag ataagtgcgg 20 59 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 59 ggacctggct caggcccctt 20 60 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 60 atcaaacagg gacctggctc 20 61 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 61 ataactgcca tcaaacaggg 20 62 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 62 gagcaccagg atcgggagga 20 63 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 63 ccagggagag caccaggatc 20 64 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 64 ttcatttgta gaatagtagt 20 65 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 65 gtctgaactc ttcatttgta 20 66 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 66 agcatttctg gtctgaactc 20 67 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 67 ggccccagtg acaatcactt 20 68 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 68 tttgctggcc ccagtgacaa 20 69 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 69 tcttccaatc cctttgctgg 20 70 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 70 cagatgatat gccatttctc 20 71 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 71 ccatttttga cagatgatat 20 72 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 72 acatgggctc ccatttttga 20 73 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 73 agtcaatacc acatgggctc 20 74 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 74 agttcaaggc agcgagacac 20 75 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 75 ggctgctccg agttcaaggc 20 76 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 76 agtgagcaga ggctgctccg 20 77 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 77 aataaattgc tccgcaaatg 20 78 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 78 cccatgagct ttcccgcctt 20 79 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 79 cgaggtctga gtgatgtggt 20 80 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 80 cagagtggat gtcgtcatgg 20 81 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 81 ttgacctcca tgactcttcg 20 82 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 82 tgaggaagtt gacctccatg 20 83 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 83 gctgccattg ctctgcttca 20 84 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 84 gcaatgctgc cattgctctg 20 85 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 85 atgacggcaa tgctgccatt 20 86 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 86 cataggctgg gtcattttcc 20 87 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 87 aaacttgctt gcagagtagg 20 88 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 88 catccagagc aaacttgctt 20 89 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 89 gaaaagaacc catccagagc 20 90 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 90 tctaatggtg gaaaagaacc 20 91 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 91 ccttggttat gtagagttct 20 92 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 92 atggacacgt tgaccttggt 20 93 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 93 acagagagtg atggacacgt 20 94 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 94 tcaattatcc cagagatttc 20 95 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 95 gatctccagg gcgcactcct 20 96 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 96 gctgtgcctt tgatgatctc 20 97 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 97 tttgcgtaga gctgtgcctt 20 98 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 98 aggcaatttg tcatagtaca 20 99 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 99 caagcaggat tggagtcaaa 20 100 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 100 atgatcttcc ttcctgggtt 20 101 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 101 aattccatga tcttccttcc 20 102 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 102 catgtcctta ttataatatc 20 103 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 103 caggagttcc tagttactta 20 104 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 104 tctaagacca ctcaccaggg 20 105 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 105 gggcttactg aagtatgagg 20 106 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 106 tctctggaaa gatacttttg 20 107 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 107 atttgtgtat ctctggaaag 20 108 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 108 gtaccccaaa atttgtgtat 20 109 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 109 ttctcatgat gaggtgtacc 20 110 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 110 tgttgcaaga atttctcatg 20 111 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 111 actgtgcaag tgttgcaaga 20 112 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 112 tacattttca ctgtgcaagt 20 113 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 113 tgacatttat tacaattaca 20 114 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 114 ggtttgtgac atttattaca 20 115 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 115 caaagtggtt tgtgacattt 20 116 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 116 tcaagttcac aactgcaggc 20 117 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 117 catagttaca atcaagttca 20 118 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 118 acaaccacta tgtgtttata 20 119 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 119 agccgataca accactatgt 20 120 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 120 gtttcattca gtgtgaggta 20 121 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 121 gaagttgata ttacctttat 20 122 20 DNA Artificial Sequence Antisense Oligonucleotide 122 tttacgaagt tgatattacc 20

Claims (20)

What is claimed is:
1. A compound 8 to 80 nucleobases in length targeted to a nucleic acid molecule encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1, wherein said compound specifically hybridizes with said nucleic acid molecule encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 and inhibits the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
2. The compound of claim 1 which is an antisense oligonucleotide.
3. The compound of claim 2 wherein the antisense oligonucleotide has a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO: 20, 21, 22, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 39, 40, 41, 42, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 55, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 73, 76, 78, 80, 82, 84, 86, 88, 89, 91, 92, 94, 97, 23, 24, 36, 37, 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 125, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 139, 143, 145 or 155.
4. The compound of claim 2 wherein the antisense oligonucleotide comprises at least one modified internucleoside linkage.
5. The compound of claim 4 wherein the modified internucleoside linkage is a phosphorothioate linkage.
6. The compound of claim 2 wherein the antisense oligonucleotide comprises at least one modified sugar moiety.
7. The compound of claim 6 wherein the modified sugar moiety is a 2′-O-methoxyethyl sugar moiety.
8. The compound of claim 2 wherein the antisense oligonucleotide comprises at least one modified nucleobase.
9. The compound of claim 8 wherein the modified nucleobase is a 5-methylcytosine.
10. The compound of claim 2 wherein the antisense oligonucleotide is a chimeric oligonucleotide.
11. A compound 8 to 80 nucleobases in length which specifically hybridizes with at least an 8-nucleobase portion of an active site on a nucleic acid molecule encoding hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1.
12. A composition comprising the compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
13. The composition of claim 12 further comprising a colloidal dispersion system.
14. The composition of claim 12 wherein the compound is an antisense oligonucleotide.
15. A method of inhibiting the expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 in cells or tissues comprising contacting said cells or tissues with the compound of claim 1 so that expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is inhibited.
16. A method of treating an animal having a disease or condition associated with hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 comprising administering to said animal a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of the compound of claim 1 so that expression of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 is inhibited.
17. The method of claim 16 wherein the disease or condition is a metabolic disorder.
18. The method of claim 17 wherein the metabolic disorder is selected from the group consisting of obesity, diabetes, atherosclerosis and hyperlipidemia.
19. The method of claim 16 wherein the disease or condition is osteoporosis.
20. The method of claim 16 wherein the disease or condition is depression.
US10/126,355 2002-04-19 2002-04-19 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression Abandoned US20030198965A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/126,355 US20030198965A1 (en) 2002-04-19 2002-04-19 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
PCT/US2003/012544 WO2003088921A2 (en) 2002-04-19 2003-04-21 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
US10/511,832 US7816336B2 (en) 2002-04-19 2003-04-21 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
AU2003231050A AU2003231050A1 (en) 2002-04-19 2003-04-21 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/126,355 US20030198965A1 (en) 2002-04-19 2002-04-19 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20030198965A1 true US20030198965A1 (en) 2003-10-23

Family

ID=29215015

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/126,355 Abandoned US20030198965A1 (en) 2002-04-19 2002-04-19 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
US10/511,832 Expired - Fee Related US7816336B2 (en) 2002-04-19 2003-04-21 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/511,832 Expired - Fee Related US7816336B2 (en) 2002-04-19 2003-04-21 Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (2) US20030198965A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2003231050A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003088921A2 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030148987A1 (en) * 2001-12-21 2003-08-07 Morris David J. Selective 11beta-HSD inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US20050020550A1 (en) * 2003-04-29 2005-01-27 Morris David J. Selective testicular 11beta-HSD inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US20050208658A1 (en) * 2003-11-21 2005-09-22 The University Of Maryland RNA interference mediated inhibition of 11beta hydroxysteriod dehydrogenase-1 (11beta HSD-1) gene expression
US20060105973A1 (en) * 2002-04-19 2006-05-18 Freier Susan M Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
WO2006059507A1 (en) * 2004-11-30 2006-06-08 Sankyo Company, Limited 11β-HSD1 ANTISENSE COMPOUND
US20060148725A1 (en) * 2001-12-21 2006-07-06 The Miriam Hospital Selective 11beta HSD inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US20060223829A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2006-10-05 Kathleen Aertgeerts Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
US20070167622A1 (en) * 2006-01-18 2007-07-19 Paul Gillespie Thiazoles as inhibitors of 11B-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
WO2009048903A1 (en) * 2007-10-08 2009-04-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 11 beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1
US20110039913A1 (en) * 2003-04-21 2011-02-17 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DK1572106T3 (en) 2002-11-15 2010-08-23 Novartis Vaccines & Diagnostic Method for the prevention and treatment of cancer metastasis and bone loss associated with cancer metastasis
WO2005020892A2 (en) * 2003-08-08 2005-03-10 Mitochroma Research, Inc. Pharmaceutical compositions and methods for metabolic modulation

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5801154A (en) * 1993-10-18 1998-09-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide modulation of multidrug resistance-associated protein
US5998148A (en) * 1999-04-08 1999-12-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Antisense modulation of microtubule-associated protein 4 expression

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6582908B2 (en) 1990-12-06 2003-06-24 Affymetrix, Inc. Oligonucleotides
US20030228597A1 (en) 1998-04-13 2003-12-11 Cowsert Lex M. Identification of genetic targets for modulation by oligonucleotides and generation of oligonucleotides for gene modulation
DE19951970A1 (en) 1999-10-28 2001-05-03 Bionetworks Gmbh Medicines for tolerance induction
SE0001899D0 (en) 2000-05-22 2000-05-22 Pharmacia & Upjohn Ab New compounds
US20030198965A1 (en) 2002-04-19 2003-10-23 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5801154A (en) * 1993-10-18 1998-09-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide modulation of multidrug resistance-associated protein
US5998148A (en) * 1999-04-08 1999-12-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Antisense modulation of microtubule-associated protein 4 expression

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060148725A1 (en) * 2001-12-21 2006-07-06 The Miriam Hospital Selective 11beta HSD inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US20030148987A1 (en) * 2001-12-21 2003-08-07 Morris David J. Selective 11beta-HSD inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US7816336B2 (en) 2002-04-19 2010-10-19 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
US20060105973A1 (en) * 2002-04-19 2006-05-18 Freier Susan M Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
US20110039913A1 (en) * 2003-04-21 2011-02-17 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
US20050020550A1 (en) * 2003-04-29 2005-01-27 Morris David J. Selective testicular 11beta-HSD inhibitors and methods of use thereof
US20050208658A1 (en) * 2003-11-21 2005-09-22 The University Of Maryland RNA interference mediated inhibition of 11beta hydroxysteriod dehydrogenase-1 (11beta HSD-1) gene expression
WO2006059507A1 (en) * 2004-11-30 2006-06-08 Sankyo Company, Limited 11β-HSD1 ANTISENSE COMPOUND
US20060223829A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2006-10-05 Kathleen Aertgeerts Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
US7759339B2 (en) 2005-03-31 2010-07-20 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase inhibitors
US7645773B2 (en) 2006-01-18 2010-01-12 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Thiazoles as inhibitors of 11β-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
US20070167622A1 (en) * 2006-01-18 2007-07-19 Paul Gillespie Thiazoles as inhibitors of 11B-hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase
US20100209990A1 (en) * 2007-10-08 2010-08-19 David Gordon 11 beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1
WO2009048903A1 (en) * 2007-10-08 2009-04-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 11 beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1
US8420365B2 (en) 2007-10-08 2013-04-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 11βhydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7816336B2 (en) 2010-10-19
US20060105973A1 (en) 2006-05-18
AU2003231050A1 (en) 2003-11-03
WO2003088921A3 (en) 2004-10-14
AU2003231050A8 (en) 2003-11-03
WO2003088921A2 (en) 2003-10-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6906186B1 (en) Antisense modulation of polo-like kinase expression
US20040014049A1 (en) Antisense modulation of protein kinase C-iota expression
US20040023384A1 (en) Antisense modulation of G protein-coupled receptor 12 expression
US7816336B2 (en) Antisense modulation of hydroxysteroid 11-beta dehydrogenase 1 expression
US20030232443A1 (en) Antisense modulation of centromere protein B expression
US20040002467A1 (en) Antisense modulation of ADAM12 expression
US20040009597A1 (en) Antisense modulation of PTPRK expression
US20040005705A1 (en) Antisense modulation of phospholipase D2 expression
US6716975B2 (en) Antisense modulation of EDG1 expression
US6468796B1 (en) Antisense modulation of bifunctional apoptosis regulator expression
US6828149B2 (en) Antisense modulation of PPP3R1 expression
US20030232436A1 (en) Antisense modulation of E2-EPF expression
US20030211606A1 (en) Antisense modulation of DYRK4 expression
US20040023904A1 (en) Antisense modulation of PTPRA expression
US20050282760A1 (en) Antisense modulation of ptpn12 expression
US20050096292A1 (en) Notch1 inhibitors for inducing apoptosis
US20030232034A1 (en) Antisense modulation of junctional adhesion molecule 3 expression
US20030225256A1 (en) Antisense modulation of pctaire protein kinase 2 expression
US20030225013A1 (en) Antisense modulation of phosphoinositide-3-kinase, regulatory subunit 4, p150 expression
US6825337B2 (en) Antisense modulation of PLML expression
US20040002151A1 (en) Antisense modulation of selenophosphate synthetase 2 expression
US20030235912A1 (en) Antisense modulation of orphan G-protein coupled receptor GPRC5B expression
US20030232977A1 (en) Antisense modulation of splicing factor R/S-rich 10 expression
US20040022765A1 (en) Antisense modulation of Ran GTPase activating protein 1 expression
US20030225015A1 (en) Antisense modulation of Rb2/p130 expression

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ISIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:FREIER, SUSAN M.;REEL/FRAME:012838/0959

Effective date: 20020419

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO PAY ISSUE FEE